0% found this document useful (0 votes)

3K views

Panasonic PC Programming Manual

Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using the KX-TDA Maintenance Console software. Certain items are linked to different sections of this manual with a PC.

Uploaded by

Penta Guard

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

3K views

Panasonic PC Programming Manual

Uploaded by

Penta Guard

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 854

Hybrid IP-PBX

PC Programming Manual
Model

KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600

Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX. Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. KX-TDA30: PSMPR Software File Version 4.0000 or later KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: PMPR Software File Version 3.2000 or later KX-TDA600: PLMPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later

Introduction
About this Programming Manual
The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using the KX-TDA Maintenance Console software. The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections:

Section 1, Overview
Provides an overview of programming the PBX.

Section 2, KX-TDA Maintenance Console Operating Instructions

Serves as reference operating instructions when using the KX-TDA Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX.

Section 3, Appendix
Provides a list of all related PC programming items for each feature, as Feature Programming References.

References Found in the PC Programming Manual

Programming Manual References
Related sections of the PC Programming Manual are listed for your reference.

Feature Guide References

The Feature Guide explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and facilities. Sections from the Feature Guide are listed throughout this manual for your reference.

Installation Manual References

The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX. Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.

Links to Other Pages and Manuals

If you are viewing this manual with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of this and other Hybrid IP-PBX manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section. Linked items include: Installation Manual References PC Programming Manual References Feature Guide References

WARNING
Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre.

PC Programming Manual

Trademarks
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Intel and Celeron are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners. Screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

NOTES
The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards? in 2.6.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ). Some optional service cards, PTs, and features are not available in some areas. Additionally, some optional service cards and features are not available for some PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice. In some cases, additional information, including updates to this and other manuals, is included in the KX-TDA Maintenance Console's Information before programming. Install the latest version of Maintenance Console to view this information.

PC Programming Manual

The KX-TDA30E, KX-TDA30NE, KX-TDA30GR, and KX-TDA30CE are designed to interwork with the: Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access The KX-TDA100E/KX-TDA200E, KX-TDA100NE/KX-TDA200NE, KX-TDA100GR/KXTDA200GR, and KX-TDA100CE/KX-TDA200CE are designed to interwork with the: Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate access ONP 2048 kbit/s digital structured leased lines (D2048S) The KX-TDA600E, KX-TDA600NE, KX-TDA600GR, and KX-TDA600CE are designed to interwork with the: Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate access ONP 2048 kbit/s digital structured leased lines (D2048S) Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd./Panasonic Communications Company (U.K.) Ltd. declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC. Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by visiting:

http://www.doc.panasonic.de
Contact: Panasonic Services Europe a Division of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH Panasonic Testing Centre Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

PC Programming Manual

Table of Contents
1 Overview ................................................................................................11
Introduction.................................................................................................................... 12 Introduction...................................................................................................................... 12 Entering Characters......................................................................................................... 13 PC Programming ........................................................................................................... 17 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console ............................................................ 17 Password Security ........................................................................................................... 21 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2

KX-TDA Maintenance Console Operating Instructions .....................23

Introduction.................................................................................................................... 24 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes ...................................................... 24 Access Levels.................................................................................................................. 27 Software Interface ........................................................................................................... 32 Card Status...................................................................................................................... 35 Display Options ............................................................................................................... 36 Extension Number Setting............................................................................................... 37 File .................................................................................................................................. 38 FileNew ........................................................................................................................ 38 FileOpen ...................................................................................................................... 39 FileClose ...................................................................................................................... 40 FileSave ....................................................................................................................... 41 FileSave As .................................................................................................................. 42 FileExit ......................................................................................................................... 43 Connect .......................................................................................................................... 44 ConnectRS-232C......................................................................................................... 44 ConnectUSB ................................................................................................................ 45 ConnectLAN................................................................................................................. 46 ConnectModem............................................................................................................ 47 ConnectISDN Remote ................................................................................................. 49 ConnectProfile Setup ................................................................................................... 50 ConnectProfile Editor ................................................................................................... 51 ConnectDisconnect...................................................................................................... 54 Tool ................................................................................................................................. 55 ToolSD memory backup............................................................................................... 55 ToolBRI Automatic Configuration ................................................................................. 56 ToolNDSS Link Data Clear........................................................................................... 57 ToolDXDP All OUS....................................................................................................... 58 ToolSimplified Voice MessageDelete All Recordings (KX-TDA30 only) ................... 59 ToolSimplified Voice MessageCheck Current Usage (KX-TDA30 only) ................... 60 ToolExtension List View ............................................................................................... 61 ToolImport .................................................................................................................... 62 ToolExport.................................................................................................................... 66 ToolProgrammer Code Change ................................................................................... 67 ToolScreen CustomizeUser Level/Administrator Level ............................................. 68 ToolLanguages............................................................................................................. 69 ToolSystem Data Convert ............................................................................................ 70 Utility............................................................................................................................... 71

2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.3.8 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.4.7 2.4.8 2.4.9 2.4.10 2.4.11 2.4.12 2.4.13 2.5

PC Programming Manual

2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6 2.5.7 2.5.8 2.5.9 2.5.10 2.5.11 2.5.12 2.5.13 2.5.14 2.5.15 2.5.16 2.5.17 2.5.18 2.6 2.6.1 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.7.5 2.7.6 2.7.7 2.7.8 2.7.9 2.7.10 2.7.11 2.7.12 2.7.13 2.7.14 2.7.15 2.7.16 2.7.17 2.7.18 2.7.19 2.7.20 2.7.21 2.7.22 2.7.23 2.7.24 2.7.25 2.7.26 2.7.27

UtilityDiagnosis .............................................................................................................71 UtilityFile Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)......................................................................75 UtilityFile Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC......................................................................81 UtilitySD Card File View and Load ...............................................................................82 UtilitySD Card File Delete............................................................................................. 83 UtilityMessage File Transfer PC to PBX .......................................................................84 UtilityMessage File Transfer PBX to PC .......................................................................85 UtilityError Log..............................................................................................................86 UtilityT1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) / E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA30)..............................................................................88 UtilityT1/E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) / E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA30) .......................................................................................................................89 UtilityISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ..................................................................................90 UtilityDigital Trunk Error Report .................................................................................... 91 UtilityIP Extension Statistical Information .....................................................................92 UtilityCS Information.....................................................................................................93 UtilityPS Information .....................................................................................................94 UtilityTimed Update ......................................................................................................95 UtilitySystem ResetReset by the Command .............................................................97 UtilityFlash ROM ID Information ...................................................................................99 Help ...............................................................................................................................100 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)................................................................................100 [1] Configuration ..........................................................................................................111 [1-1] Slot.........................................................................................................................111 [1-1] SlotSummary...................................................................................................... 116 [1-1] SlotMPR Card Property......................................................................................120 [1-1] SlotExtension Card Property..............................................................................122 [1-1] SlotExtension Port..............................................................................................127 [1-1] SlotExtension PortPort Command ..................................................................134 [1-1] SlotExtension PortPort Type View ..................................................................135 [1-1] SlotCSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ..............................136 [1-1] SlotCSI/F PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ......... 138 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property ......................................................................................139 [1-1] SlotLCO Port ...................................................................................................... 151 [1-1] SlotLCO PortPort Command ..........................................................................157 [1-1] SlotBRI/PRI Card Property.................................................................................158 [1-1] SlotBRI Port........................................................................................................ 171 [1-1] SlotBRI PortPort Command ............................................................................195 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) .................................196 [1-1] SlotPRI PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)......217 [1-1] SlotT1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ...................218 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ...................................228 [1-1] SlotT1 PortChannel Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)........236 [1-1] SlotE1 Card Property .........................................................................................237 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyLine Signal Setting........................................................245 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC1............................................................................253 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC2............................................................................259 [1-1] SlotE1 Port .........................................................................................................266 [1-1] SlotE1 PortChannel Command....................................................................... 275 [1-1] SlotE&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)................276

PC Programming Manual

2.7.28 2.7.29 2.7.30 2.7.31 2.7.32 2.7.33 2.7.34 2.7.35 2.7.36 2.7.37 2.7.38 2.7.39 2.7.40 2.7.41 2.7.42 2.7.43 2.7.44 2.7.45 2.7.46 2.7.47 2.7.48 2.7.49 2.8 2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.3 2.8.4 2.8.5 2.8.6 2.8.7 2.8.8 2.8.9 2.8.10 2.8.11 2.8.12 2.8.13 2.8.14 2.8.15 2.8.16 2.8.17 2.8.18 2.8.19 2.8.20 2.9 2.9.1 2.9.2 2.9.3 2.9.4 2.9.5 2.9.6

[1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ............................... 284 [1-1] SlotE&M PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ... 291 [1-1] SlotDID Card Property....................................................................................... 292 [1-1] SlotDID Port....................................................................................................... 297 [1-1] SlotDID PortPort Command ........................................................................... 304 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Card Property .................................................................................. 305 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Port .................................................................................................. 307 [1-1] SlotIP-GW PortPort Command ...................................................................... 309 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card Property......................................................................... 310 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card PropertyCommon Settings ........................................ 314 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Port......................................................................................... 316 [1-1] SlotSIP-GW Card Property (KX-TDA30 only).................................................... 322 [1-1] SlotSIP-GW Port (KX-TDA30 only).................................................................... 323 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)....................................... 325 [1-1] SlotOPB Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ............ 330 [1-1] SlotOPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ...... 332 [1-1] SlotCTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ........ 334 [1-1] SlotDPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only) ......................................................... 336 [1-1] SlotDPH Port Command (KX-TDA30 only)........................................................ 339 [1-2] Portable Station ..................................................................................................... 340 [1-3] Option.................................................................................................................... 344 [1-4] Clock Priority ......................................................................................................... 346 [2] System .................................................................................................................... 347 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving................................................................................. 347 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight SavingDate & Time Setting............................................. 349 [2-2] Operator & BGM.................................................................................................... 350 [2-3] Timers & Counters ................................................................................................ 353 [2-4] Week Table............................................................................................................ 373 [2-4] Week TableTime Setting .................................................................................... 374 [2-5] Holiday Table ......................................................................................................... 377 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain ...................................................................................... 379 [2-6-2] Numbering PlanQuick Dial ............................................................................. 407 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature ........................................................ 409 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings........................................................................ 413 [2-7-2] Class of ServiceExternal Call Block ............................................................... 428 [2-7-3] Class of ServiceInternal Call Block ................................................................ 429 [2-8-1] Ring Tone PatternsCall from CO .................................................................... 430 [2-8-2] Ring Tone PatternsCall from Doorphone........................................................ 431 [2-8-3] Ring Tone PatternsCall from Others............................................................... 432 [2-9] System Options ..................................................................................................... 434 [2-10] Extension CID Settings ....................................................................................... 461 [2-11-1] Audio GainPaging/MOH ............................................................................... 465 [2-11-2] Audio GainCard ............................................................................................ 468 [3] Group ...................................................................................................................... 469 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG Settings .............................................................................. 469 [3-1-2] Trunk GroupLocal Access Priority .................................................................. 477 [3-1-3] Trunk GroupCharge Rate ............................................................................... 478 [3-2] User Group............................................................................................................ 479 [3-3] Call Pickup Group ................................................................................................. 480 [3-3] Call Pickup GroupAll Setting.............................................................................. 481

PC Programming Manual

2.9.7 2.9.8 2.9.9 2.9.10 2.9.11 2.9.12 2.9.13 2.9.14 2.9.15 2.9.16 2.9.17 2.9.18 2.9.19 2.9.20 2.9.21 2.9.22 2.9.23 2.9.24 2.9.25 2.10 2.10.1 2.10.2 2.10.3 2.10.4 2.10.5 2.10.6 2.10.7 2.10.8 2.10.9 2.10.10 2.10.11 2.10.12 2.10.13 2.10.14 2.10.15 2.10.16 2.10.17 2.10.18 2.11 2.11.1 2.11.2 2.11.3 2.11.4 2.11.5 2.11.6 2.11.7 2.12 2.12.1 2.12.2 2.12.3

[3-4] Paging Group .........................................................................................................482 [3-4] Paging GroupAll Setting .....................................................................................484 [3-4] Paging GroupExternal Pager..............................................................................485 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings ............................................487 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution GroupQueuing Time Table ....................................502 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMiscellaneous..............................................503 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMember .......................................................505 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group.......................................................................................507 [3-6] Extension Hunting GroupMember List ...............................................................509 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) GroupSystem Settings ....................................................................510 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) GroupUnit Settings..........................................................................512 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) GroupUnit SettingsMember List ..................................................513 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings .................................................................516 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup Settings ...................................................................525 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup SettingsMember List ............................................527 [3-9] PS Ring Group.......................................................................................................528 [3-9] PS Ring GroupMember List ...............................................................................530 [3-10] Broadcasting Group ............................................................................................. 531 [3-10] Broadcasting GroupMember List......................................................................532 [4] Extension................................................................................................................. 533 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings ................................................................533 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsCLIP Generate.....................................584 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND .............................................................................586 [4-1-3] Wired ExtensionSpeed Dial ............................................................................590 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button ......................................................................591 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonFlexible Button Data Copy .........................607 [4-1-5] Wired ExtensionPF Button ..............................................................................608 [4-1-6] Wired ExtensionNDSS Link Data - Send ........................................................609 [4-1-7] Wired ExtensionSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only) .........................610 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings .................................................................613 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsCLIP Generate .....................................642 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND............................................................................644 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button ....................................................................... 648 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonFlexible Button Data Copy ..........................661 [4-2-4] Portable StationNDSS Link Data - Send .........................................................662 [4-2-5] Portable StationSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)..........................663 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button ..............................................................................665 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonFlexible button Data Copy..................................681 [5] Optional Device.......................................................................................................682 [5-1] Doorphone .............................................................................................................682 [5-2] External Pager .......................................................................................................686 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA System ..........................................................................687 [5-3-2] Voice MessageDISA Message ........................................................................694 [5-3-3] Voice MessageSVM (KX-TDA30 only) ............................................................ 697 [5-4] External Relay........................................................................................................ 701 [5-5] External Sensor .....................................................................................................704 [6] Feature.....................................................................................................................707 [6-1] System Speed Dial ................................................................................................707 [6-2] Caller ID Modification............................................................................................. 709 [6-3] Verification Code....................................................................................................712

PC Programming Manual

2.12.4 2.12.5 2.12.6 2.12.7 2.12.8 2.12.9 2.13 2.13.1 2.13.2 2.13.3 2.13.4 2.13.5 2.14 2.14.1 2.14.2 2.14.3 2.14.4 2.14.5 2.14.6 2.14.7 2.14.8 2.15 2.15.1 2.15.2 2.15.3 2.15.4 2.16 2.16.1 2.16.2 2.16.3 2.16.4 2.16.5 2.16.6 2.16.7 2.17 2.17.1 2.17.2 2.17.3

[6-4] Second Dial Tone .................................................................................................. 715 [6-5] Absent Message.................................................................................................... 716 [6-6] Tenant.................................................................................................................... 717 [6-7] Dialling Plan .......................................................................................................... 719 [6-7] Dialling PlanAuto Assign.................................................................................... 721 [6-8] Hotel & Charge...................................................................................................... 722 [7] TRS .......................................................................................................................... 731 [7-1] Denied Code ......................................................................................................... 731 [7-2] Exception Code ..................................................................................................... 732 [7-3] Special Carrier Code ............................................................................................. 733 [7-4] Emergency Dial ..................................................................................................... 734 [7-5] Miscellaneous........................................................................................................ 735 [8] ARS.......................................................................................................................... 738 [8-1] System Settings .................................................................................................... 738 [8-2] Leading Number.................................................................................................... 739 [8-3] Routing Plan Time................................................................................................. 741 [8-3] Routing Plan TimeTime Setting ......................................................................... 742 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority ............................................................................................. 743 [8-5] Carrier ................................................................................................................... 744 [8-6] Leading Number Exception ................................................................................... 747 [8-7] Authorisation Code for TRG .................................................................................. 748 [9] Private Network ...................................................................................................... 749 [9-1] TIE Table ............................................................................................................... 749 [9-2] Network Data Transmission................................................................................... 752 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP) ....................................................................................... 755 [9-4] NDSS Key Table .................................................................................................... 757 [10] CO & Incoming Call.............................................................................................. 759 [10-1] CO Line Settings ................................................................................................. 759 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings .................................................................................... 762 [10-3] DDI / DID Table ................................................................................................... 772 [10-3] DDI/DID TableAutomatic Registration.............................................................. 775 [10-3] DDI/DID TableName Generate ........................................................................ 777 [10-4] MSN Table........................................................................................................... 779 [10-5] Miscellaneous...................................................................................................... 783 [11] Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 785 [11-1] Main..................................................................................................................... 785 [11-2] PT Programming Access..................................................................................... 803 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)................... 804

Appendix..............................................................................................805
Revision History .......................................................................................................... 806 KX-TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 3.1xxx........................................................ 806 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 3.2xxx...................................... 808 KX-TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 4.0xxx ......................................................... 809 Feature Programming References............................................................................. 811

3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.2

PC Programming Manual

Section

Overview

This section provides an overview of programming the PBX.

PC Programming Manual

1.1 Introduction

1.1
1.1.1

Introduction
Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system programming". Only one person can perform system programming at a time. Any other users trying to enter programming mode will be denied access.

Ways to Programme
There are two programming methods: PC (Personal Computer) Programming All features and settings of the PBX can be programmed through PC programming with KXTDA Maintenance Console. Installing and starting the Maintenance Console is described in Section 1.2 PC Programming. Individual PC programming items are described in KX-TDA Maintenance Console Operating Instructions. PT (Proprietary Telephone) Programming A subset of the features and settings of the PBX can be programmed using a PT. PT programming is described in the PT Programming Manual.

PC Programming Manual

1.1 Introduction

1.1.2

Entering Characters
The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX. Table 1 (Standard)

PC Programming Manual

1.1 Introduction

Table 2 (For CE model)

PC Programming Manual

1.1 Introduction

Table 3 (For RU model)

PC Programming Manual

1.1 Introduction

Table 4 (For GR model)

PC Programming Manual

1.2 PC Programming

1.2
1.2.1

PC Programming
Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using the Maintenance Console (KX-TDA30: KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console; KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: KXTDA Maintenance Console; KX-TDA600: KX-TDA600 Maintenance Console). This section briefly describes how to install and start the Maintenance Console when the PC and the PBX are connected by USB cable. The screenshots shown in the installation procedure are based on the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console.

System Requirements
Required Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP Minimum Hardware Requirements CPU: 300 MHz Intel Celeron microprocessor HDD: 100 MB of available hard disk space RAM: 128 MB of available RAM

PC Programming Manual

1.2 PC Programming

Installing the Maintenance Console

Notes To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional, you must be logged in as a user in either the "Administrators" or "Power Users" group. To connect the PC to the Hybrid IP-PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB driver must be installed. Follow the instructions of the wizard to install the KX-TDA USB driver. When the Hybrid IPPBX is first connected to the PC via USB, you may be asked to select the appropriate USB driver. Browse for and select the KX-TDA USB driver that was installed previously. 1. Copy the setup file of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console to your PC. (Its icon is shown here, on the left.) 2. Double-click the setup file to run the installer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the installation wizard.

Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (Quick Setup)
When you start the KX-TDA Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code and connect to the Hybrid IP-PBX for the first time after initialisation (with the factory default setting), Quick Setup will launch automatically. During Quick Setup, you will set up the following basic items: Date and Time of the Hybrid IP-PBX. The date and time set to the PC's clock will be used. System Password for installer for PC programming. Operator and manager settings. Operator extensions for all time modes (day/lunch/break/ night) can be assigned. Flexible Numbering plan to Type 1 or Type 2. If Type 1 (with ) is selected, " " must prefix all feature numbers (except access numbers) when an extension user wants to use a feature. Operator call and Idle Line Access/ARS numbers. Remote Maintenance Dial Number. Enter the complete telephone number of the Hybrid IPPBX (including the country code). When necessary, this number will be used to access the Hybrid IP-PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes. 1. Connect the PC to the Hybrid IP-PBX with a USB cable. 2. Start Maintenance Console from the Start menu. 3. "Information before programming" appears.

a. Carefully read this important additional information,

which includes updates to this and other manuals.

b. Click [OK] to close this window.

PC Programming Manual

1.2 PC Programming

4. Enter the Installer Level Programmer Code (default: INSTALLER). The Programmer Code authorises different programming levels, and the Quick Setup is only available when you start the KX-TDA Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code. Note There are 2 other Programmer Codes with limited authorisation: Administrator Level (default: ADMIN), and User Level (default: USER). ( 1.2.2 Password Security) 5. a. Click the check box to connect to the Hybrid IP-PBX. Options will appear as shown here, on the left. 1234).

b. Enter the system password for installer (default: c. Select "USB", then click [OK].
Note To connect to the Hybrid IP-PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB driver must be installed on the PC, as explained above in "Installing the Maintenance Console".

6. When country/area data do not match:

a. Click [OK] to replace the country/area data of the

PBX. Replacement may take several minutes to complete.

b. Follow the procedure described in Section 2.15.1

Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX (for KX-TDA600), Section 2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX (for KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200) or 2.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX (for KX-TDA30) in the Installation Manual and restart the PBX.

c. Click "Connect" "USB" from the menu bar. d. Repeat step 5 to restart the Maintenance Console.
7. Follow the instructions of the Quick Setup wizard and assign the basic items.

PC Programming Manual

1.2 PC Programming

The programme menu appears. You may now begin programming the Hybrid IP-PBX.

Notice

1. During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the
system data to the SD Memory Card. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset for some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system data has been saved to the SD Memory Card, it can be easily restored. To save the system data to the SD Memory Card, (1) click the "SD Memory Backup" icon before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) exit the Maintenance Console so that the PBX automatically saves the system data.

To start Maintenance Console in Interactive mode 1. Enter the relevant programmer code. 2. Select the Connect to PBX check box.
Connection options will be displayed. Select the Use profile check box if you want to use a pre-saved profile. This option is only available when one or more profiles have been previously stored.

a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.

The Setup button will become unavailable.

b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered. Select the method of connecting to the PBX if you do not want to use a stored profile.

PC Programming Manual

2.1 Introduction

a. b. c. d.

Enter the system password for the PBX. Click Setup. Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the tables below. Click OK.

3. Click OK.
Maintenance Console will start, and automatically connect to the PBX. If this is the first time that Maintenance Console has connected to the PBX, and the date and time of the PBX have not yet been set, the Quick Setup wizard will run. For more details, see Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (Quick Setup).

Connection Settings for RS-232C Setting Port Values COMx Explanation Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC's RS-232C interface. Only available COM ports are displayed. Specify the speed of data transmission.

Baud Rate (bps)

2400bps, 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Connection Settings for Modem Setting Dial Number Values Explanation

1-9, 0, *, #, "," [comma], Enter the telephone number to be dialled to access the PBX. T, P, W*1 T: Converts the Dial Type from Pulse to Tone. "," [comma], P, W: Inserts a pause. Auto(Tone), Auto(Pulse), Manual COMx Specify the outgoing dialling method. If Manual is chosen, dialling must be done with a connected telephone. Enter a comment to identify the set of values. Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC's modem interface. Only available COM ports will be displayed. Specify the speed of data transmission.

Dial Type

Comment Port

Baud Rate

1200bps, 2400bps, 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Modem Initialise

Enter the modem initialise command, and click Initialise to send the command to the modem. For more details, refer to your modem's instruction manual.

*1: T, P and W can only be entered when using MPR Software File Version 3.2000 or later.

PC Programming Manual

2.1 Introduction

Connection Settings for LAN Setting IP Address Values 1.0.0.0 223.255.255.255 Explanation Specify the IP address of the PBX on the LAN. Enter the same IP address that was input in IP Address of 2.7.44 [1-1] SlotCTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600 only). Specify the port number used to access the PBX via LAN. Enter the same port number that was input in Maintenance Port Number of 2.7.44 [1-1] SlotCTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) or 2.7.33 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Card Property (KX-TDA30 only).

Port Number

1000065535

Connection Setting for ISDN Remote Setting Dial Number Values 30 digits (consisting of 1-9, 0, *, # and "," [comma]) Explanation Enter the telephone number to be dialled to access the PBX.

PC Programming Manual

2.1 Introduction

2.1.2

Access Levels
There are three main levels of access to the Maintenance Console: User, Administrator and Installer. Each level has its own Programmer Code, which must be entered to run the Maintenance Console. The allowed format for each programmer code is as follows: Item User Level Programmer Code Administrator Level Programmer Code Installer Level Programmer Code Length 0 16 characters 4 16 characters 4 16 characters

Access to menu options within the Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the Programmer Code, and the current software mode (see 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes). When a menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that menu option, for example: "This option is only available at Installer level." If a sentence like this does not appear under the heading, the menu option is available at all levels. The target users for each access level are as follows: Access Level User Administrator Installer User For end users For system administrators For dealers and system installers

The options available in each mode and access level are shown below. The access levels are abbreviated as follows: U: User; A: Administrator; I: Installer A check mark indicates that the menu option is available for that access level. File Menu Option U New Open Close Save Save As Exit Initial A I U Batch A I Interactive U A I

PC Programming Manual

2.1 Introduction

Connect Menu Option U RS-232C USB LAN Modem ISDN Remote Profile Setup Disconnect Tool Menu Option U SD memory backup BRI Automatic Configuration NDSS Link Data Clear DXDP All OUS Simplified Voice MessageDelete All Recordings (KX-TDA30 only) Simplified Voice MessageCheck Use Situation (KX-TDA30 only) Extension List View ImportFeature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ImportIncoming Call - DDI/DID Table ImportARS - Leading Digit ImportARS - Except Code ImportARS - Routing Plan ImportWired Extension ImportPS Extension ImportQuick Dial (Basic) Initial A I U Batch A I Interactive U A I Initial A I U Batch A I Interactive U A I

PC Programming Manual

2.1 Introduction

Tool Menu Option U ImportQuick Dial (MEC) ImportPS Registration (KX-TDA600 only) ExportFeature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ExportIncoming Call - DDI/DID Table ExportARS - Leading Digit ExportARS - Except Code ExportARS - Routing Plan ExportWired Extension ExportPS Extension ExportQuick Dial (Basic) ExportQuick Dial (MEC) ExportPS Registration (KX-TDA600 only) Programmer Code ChangeUser Level Programmer Code ChangeAdministrator Level Programmer Code ChangeInstaller Level Screen CustomizeUser Level Screen CustomizeAdministrator Level Languages System Data Convert Utility Menu Option U Diagnosis File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC Initial A I U Batch A I Interactive U A I Initial A I U Batch A I Interactive U A I

PC Programming Manual

2.1 Introduction

Utility Menu Option U SD Card File View and Load SD Card File Delete Message File Transfer PC to PBX Message File Transfer PBX to PC Error Log T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA30) T1/E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600) E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA30) ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace Digital Trunk Error Report IP Extension Statistical Information CS Information PS Information Timed Update System ResetReset by the Command Flash ROM ID Information View Menu Option U Toolbar Status Bar System Menu Initial A I U Batch A I Interactive U A I Initial A I U Batch A I Interactive U A I

PC Programming Manual

2.1 Introduction

Window Menu Option U Cascade Tile(Horz) Tile(Vert) Help Menu Option U Help Additional Information About Initial A I U Batch A I Interactive U A I Initial A I U Batch A I Interactive U A I

PC Programming Manual

2.1 Introduction

2.1.3

Software Interface
This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface.

Main Window
The window of the Maintenance Console software is divided into several areas, as shown below:

2 3

1. Menu Bar
Provides access to file management and connection options, as well as tools and utilities used in programming the PBX. For details, see Sections 2.2 File to 2.6 Help.

PC Programming Manual

2.1 Introduction

2. Tool Bar
Provides easy access to commonly used software functions. Two tool bars are provided, as follows: File Contains icons for creating, opening, and saving files. For details, see Sections 2.2.1 File New, 2.2.2 FileOpen, and 2.2.4 FileSave. Tools Contains icons for backing up PBX data to the SD Memory Card, viewing extension information, and accessing Online Help. For details, see Sections 2.4.1 ToolSD memory backup and 2.4.7 ToolExtension List View. These menus can be positioned freely. Click and drag the title bar of a menu to move it to another position. It will automatically snap in to position above, below, to the left, or to the right of the main window if released there. Otherwise, it will float separately from the main window. Whether the tool bar is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting Toolbar from the View menu.

3. Tab Bar
The name of each screen currently open is displayed in a tab in this tab bar. When multiple screens are open at the same time, click on the tab of a screen to display the options associated with that screen.

4. System Menu
Provides access to the settings used for programming the PBX, grouped into 11 topics. For details, see Sections 2.7 [1] Configuration to 2.17 [11] Maintenance. To display the individual screens within a topic, click the topic heading. It will expand to show the subtopics. If a sub-topic contains more than one screen, clicking the name of the sub-topic will display the names of individual screens. Clicking an expanded sub-topic will hide the names of individual screens. Double-click on a screen name to open that screen in 6. Main Screen below. This menu can be positioned freely. Click and drag the title bar of the menu to move it to another position. It will automatically snap in to either the left side or right side of the main window if released there. Otherwise, it will float separately from the main window. Whether the system menu is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting System Menu from the View menu.

5. Status Bar
The status bar displays information on the current state of the Maintenance Console. Whether the status bar is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting Statusbar from the View menu. The information displayed is as follows, in order from left to right: Area Program Mode Values Initial Mode Batch Mode xxx Interactive Mode Type: TDA30/TDA100/ TDA200/TDA600 Description See 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes above. "xxx" is replaced by the name of the current system data file. Displays the type of PBX being programmed.

PBX Type

PC Programming Manual

2.1 Introduction

Area Access Level

Values Level : User Administrator Installer Versionxxx-xxx

Description Displays the current access level, determined by the Programmer Code entered when starting Maintenance Console. See 2.1.2 Access Levels for more information. Displays the version number of the system software installed to the PBX. The first 3 digits are the version number, and the last 3 digits are the revision number. Displays the region code assigned to the PBX and Maintenance Console. The first 3 digits represent the region code assigned to the PBX, and the last 3 digits represent the region code assigned to the Maintenance Console.

PBX System Data Version

PBX Region Code

Regionxxx-xxx

6. Main Screen
Displays the screens selected from 4. System Menu above. For details, see Sections 2.7 [1] Configuration to 2.17 [11] Maintenance.

Standard Buttons and Elements

There are several standard buttons that are displayed on many screens within the Maintenance Console. The standard buttons are as follows: Button OK Cancel Close Apply Refresh Help Function Implements changes and closes the current screen. Abandons changes and returns to the previous screen. Keeps any changes implemented, and closes the current screen. Implements changes and remains on the same screen. Implements changes, updates displayed data, and remains on the current screen. Displays the relevant help topic for the current screen.

In addition, many screens within the software display a small open folder icon ( ) beside lists of setting items. Clicking this icon will collapse part of the list, allowing other items to be displayed. The icon will change to a closed folder ( ). Clicking the closed folder icon will expand the list again.

PC Programming Manual

2.1 Introduction

2.1.4

Card Status
Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or inservice (INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card status changes can only be performed when the software is in Interactive mode (see 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes). "In service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, and is capable of being used normally. "Out of service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, but has been temporarily removed from use. This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded. "Fault" means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly, or is not functioning correctly. For more information, see the Installation Manual. For details about how to change the status of a card, see To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (Interactive mode only) on screen 2.7.1 [1-1] Slot.

PC Programming Manual

2.1 Introduction

2.1.5

Display Options
The View and Window menus provide options to control the display of items within the Maintenance Console. View Toolbar: Displays or hides the tool bar of commonly used buttons. Statusbar: Displays or hides the bar at the bottom of the Maintenance Console window. System Menu: Displays or hides the menu of PBX setting screens. Window Cascade: When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens overlapped, with the title bars visible. Tile(Horz): When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens side by side. Tile(Vert): When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens vertically.

PC Programming Manual

2.1 Introduction

2.1.6

Extension Number Setting

Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button. This section explains how to use this Extension Number Setting window. To select multiple extension numbers, select the type of extension to display, highlight the extensions you wish to add, then click the Add button. When finished, click OK. Data for the selected extensions will be added to the first free spaces on the original screen.

Extension Type
Selects the types of extension numbers to display in Extension Numbers & Names List. Multiple items can be selected. Items that are not available are shown with a grey checkbox.

Value Range
Wired Extension, Portable Station, VM Group(DPT), VM Group(DTMF), ICD Group, PS Ring Group, OGM(DISA), External Pager, Analogue MODEM, ISDN Remote

Extension Numbers & Names List

Displays all available extensions of the types selected in Extension Type, and names. Click entries to select them, and click the Add button when finished, to add the selected extensions. To deselect an entry, click it again.

Value Range
Matching extensions

Available Column
Specifies which fields in the original form to add extension data to. For example, if both extension numbers and names can be entered in the original form, it is possible to specify that extension name data not be transferred, by deselecting that field here. To select or deselect a field, click its name.

Value Range
Available fields

Selected Extension List

Displays the extensions that have been selected to be added to member data. To remove an extension from this list, click it to select it and click Delete.

Value Range
Selected extensions

PC Programming Manual

2.2 File

2.2
2.2.1

File
FileNew
Creates a new system data file, used to programme the PBX in Batch mode. All settings are in their initial or default state. This option is only available at Installer level. To upload the file created here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.5.2 UtilityFile Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card). Note Since selecting this option creates a blank system data file, uploading this file to the PBX will overwrite all previous settings. Use only when necessary.

To create a new system data file 1. From the File menu, select New. 2. Click the appropriate model number. 3. Select whether an EMEC (KX-TDA600) or MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) card is
installed or not.

4. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual

2.2 File

2.2.2

FileOpen
Opens a system data file previously saved on the PC, and enters Batch mode. When opening a file created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked whether you want to convert the data for use with the current version or not. Using the data without converting may result in some data being loaded to an incorrect destination, and is not recommended. For more details regarding file conversion, see 2.4.13 ToolSystem Data Convert. If the file is not supported by the PBX (e.g. a system data file from an incompatible PBX), it will not be opened. The only files that can be opened are files that were created by the Maintenance Console for a supported PBX. To upload a file opened here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.5.2 UtilityFile Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

To open a system data file 1. From the File menu, select Open.
The Open dialogue box will be displayed.

2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open. 3. Select the file. 4. Click Open.
If the file was created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked if you want to convert the data. Click Yes to convert the data for use with the current version of the Maintenance Console. Enter a name for the new converted system file. Click No to open the file as it is.

PC Programming Manual

2.2 File

2.2.3

FileClose
Closes the system data file that is currently being modified, and returns to Initial mode.

To close a system data file

From the File menu, select Close. If the system data file has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file. Click Yes to save the file. Click No to abandon the changes.

PC Programming Manual

2.2 File

2.2.4

FileSave
Overwrites the previously saved system data file with the system data currently being modified in Batch mode. To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.5.2 UtilityFile Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

To save a system data file

From the File menu, select Save. If the data has never been saved, the Save dialogue box will be displayed. For more details, see 2.2.5 FileSave As.

PC Programming Manual

2.2 File

2.2.5

FileSave As
Saves the system data file being modified in Batch mode with the name chosen by the user. To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.5.2 UtilityFile Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

To save a system data file with a new name 1. From the File menu, select Save As. 2. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite. 4. Click Save.
If choosing to overwrite another file, a warning message will be displayed. Click Yes to overwrite. Click No to return to the previous screen.

PC Programming Manual

2.2 File

2.2.6

FileExit
Closes the Maintenance Console.

To exit the Maintenance Console

From the File menu, select Exit. If the system data file being modified has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file. Click Yes to save the file. Click No to abandon the changes.

PC Programming Manual

2.3 Connect

2.3
2.3.1

Connect
ConnectRS-232C
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the serial RS-232C interface of the PBX. This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.3.6 ConnectProfile Setup for more details about creating profiles.

To connect to the PBX by RS-232C 1. From the Connect menu, select RS-232C.
The Login window will be displayed.

2. Select a connection option.

Select the Use profile check box if you want to use a pre-saved profile. This option is only available when one or more profiles have been previously stored.

a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.

The Setup button will become unavailable.

b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered. Confirm that the RS-232C radio button is selected if you want to enter the parameters manually.

a. Click Setup. b. Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the table below. c. Click OK. 3. Click OK.
Connection Settings for RS-232C Setting Port Values COMx Explanation Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC's RS-232C interface. Only available COM ports are displayed. Specify the speed of data transmission.

Baud Rate (bps)

2400bps, 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

PC Programming Manual

2.3 Connect

2.3.2

ConnectUSB
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the USB port on the PBX, or a USB port (USB Module) attached to a DPT.

PC Programming Manual

2.3 Connect

Connection Settings for Modem Setting Modem Initialise Values Description Enter the modem initialise command, and click Initialise to send the command to the modem. For more details, refer to your modem's instruction manual.

*1: T, P and W can only be entered when using MPR Software File Version 3.2000 or later.

The Profile Editor window will be displayed.

3. 4. 5. 6.

Enter a name for this profile. Enter the system password used to connect to the PBX. Select the default connection method. Enter the detailed connection method settings as required. See the tables below for more information. Note that it is possible to select connection methods other than the default method when using this profile to connect to the PBX. For this reason, you can choose to input settings for multiple connection methods in a single profile. Click the tabs to view the settings for each type of connection.

7. Click Save.

PC Programming Manual

2.3 Connect

Baud Rate (bps)

2400bps, 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Connection Settings for Modem Setting Dial Number Values Description

Dial Type

Comment Port

Baud Rate

1200bps, 2400bps, 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Modem Initialise

Enter the modem initialise command, and click Initialise to send the command to the modem. For more details, refer to your modem's instruction manual.

*1: T, P and W can only be entered when using MPR Software File Version 3.2000 or later. Connection Settings for LAN Setting IP Address Values 1.0.0.0 223.255.255.255 Explanation Specify the IP address of the PBX on the LAN. Enter the same IP address that was input in IP Address of 2.7.44 [1-1] SlotCTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600 only).

PC Programming Manual

2.3 Connect

Connection Settings for LAN Setting Port Number Values 1000065535 Explanation Specify the port number used to access the PBX via LAN. Enter the same port number that was input in Maintenance Port Number of 2.7.44 [1-1] SlotCTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) or 2.7.33 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Card Property (KX-TDA30 only).

Connection Setting for ISDN Remote Setting Dial Number Values 30 digits (consisting of 1-9, 0, *, # and "," [comma]) Explanation Enter the telephone number to be dialled to access the PBX.

PC Programming Manual

2.3 Connect

2.3.8

ConnectDisconnect
Closes the connection between the Maintenance Console and the PBX. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the SD memory card (see 2.4.1 ToolSD memory backup).

To disconnect 1. From the Connect menu, select Disconnect.

A confirmation message will be displayed.

2. Click Yes.

PC Programming Manual

2.4 Tool

2.4
2.4.1

Tool
ToolSD memory backup
Saves system data from the PBX to the SD memory card. Backup begins as soon as this option is chosen.

To back up system data

From the Tool menu, select SD memory backup.

PC Programming Manual

2.4 Tool

2.4.2

ToolBRI Automatic Configuration

Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card. This option is only available at Installer level. This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and TEI Mode, on the Network tab of the 2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port screen. Notes

Only one card can be configured at a time. To use this tool, the card to be configured must be pre-set to OUS status. For more details, see 2.1.4 Card Status. When configuration is complete, the card is automatically returned to INS status. At any time on this screen, you can click Close to return to the previous screen without saving.

To configure the BRI card 1. From the Tool menu, select BRI Automatic Configuration. 2. Select the BRI card to configure by clicking the Check cell and setting it to ON (blue). 3. Click OK.
The ports associated with the selected BRI card will be displayed on a new screen.

4. Enter suitable Subscriber Numbers for the ports you want to configure.
Only ports whose Subscriber Numbers have been entered will be configured.

5. Click Execute.
The results of configuration will be displayed.

6. Click Data Apply to save these results to the BRI card.

PC Programming Manual

2.4 Tool

2.4.3

ToolNDSS Link Data Clear

Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.

Displays information on the voice messages stored in SVM cards installed in the PBX. For each message, the type of message and the associated extension are displayed.

To view SVM message status

From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Check Current Usage.

PC Programming Manual

2.4 Tool

2.4.7

ToolExtension List View

Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. The types that can be displayed are as follows: Type Intercom VM Portable Station ICDG WG VM (DPT) VM (DTMF) Pager MODEM ISDN Remote OGM (DISA) DSS DPT-I/F CS SVM Detail Wired Extension Voice Mail Wireless Extension (Portable Station) Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group VM (DPT) Group VM (DTMF) Group External Pager Analogue Modem ISDN Modem DISA DSS Console PT-interface CS SVM Card

To view extension information

From the Tool menu, select Extension List View.

PC Programming Manual

2.4 Tool

2.4.8

ToolImport
Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level. The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using the Export tool (see 2.4.9 ToolExport), or comma-separated value (CSV) files. Unsupported file types cannot be opened. PS Registration (KX-TDA600 only) files are saved with the extension ".kex" by default. For all tables except ARS - Routing Plan and PS Registration (KX-TDA600 only), it is possible to edit the CSV file directly using an appropriate editor, before importing. The types of data that can be imported using this tool, and the matching destination fields, are as follows:

Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID Data Type System Speed Dialling Number Name Import Destination Location Name

CO Line Access Number + Dial Telephone Number CLI Destination CLI Destination

Related programming: 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table Data Type Location DDI/DID Number DDI/DID Name DDI/DID Destination-Day Import Destination Location Dial In Number Dial In Name Destination-Day

DDI/DID Destination-Lunch Destination-Lunch DDI/DID Destination-Break Destination-Break DDI/DID Destination-Night Tenant Number VM Trunk Group No. CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Day Destination-Night Tenant Number Group Number for VPS Answer CLI Ring - Day

CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Lunch CLI Ring - Lunch CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Break CLI Ring - Break CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Night CLI Ring - Night

PC Programming Manual

2.4 Tool

Related programming: 2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

ARS - Leading Digit Data Type No. Leading Number Import Destination Location Leading Digit

Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number

Related programming: 2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number

ARS - Except Code Data Type No. Import Destination Location

Leading Number Exception Exception Code Related programming: 2.14.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception

ARS - Routing Plan Data Type (no fields to select) Import Destination (no fields to select)

Related programming: 2.14.3 [8-3] Routing Plan Time

Wired Extension Data Type No. Extension Number Extension Name Import Destination Location (selected automatically) Extension Number (selected automatically) Extension Name (selected automatically)

Related programming: 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

PS Extension Data Type No. Import Destination Location (selected automatically)

PC Programming Manual

2.4 Tool

PS Extension Data Type Extension Number Extension Name Import Destination Extension Number (selected automatically) Extension Name (selected automatically)

Related programming: 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Quick Dial (Basic) Data Type No. Dial Phone Number Import Destination Location Dial Phone Number

Related programming: 2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering PlanQuick Dial

Quick Dial (MEC) Data Type No. Dial Phone Number Import Destination Location Dial Phone Number

Related programming: 2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering PlanQuick Dial

DLC4

DLC8

SLC4

SLC8

DID3

Local loop back diagnosis Card CT Bus diagnosis DTMF Receive test port MSG/SVM Card DTMF receive test EXT-CID path test DSP DTMF generator/receiver diagnosis DSP DTMF receiver diagnosis Framer IC alarm signal detection diagnosis Framer IC error detection diagnosis

PC Programming Manual

DPH

BRI

2.5 Utility

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 SLC16/MSLC16/ESLC16/EMSLC16/CSLC16

IP-GW4 (TDA0484)

LCOT/ELCOT

Local loop back diagnosis Card CT Bus diagnosis (KXTDA100/KX-TDA200 only) DTMF Receive test port PT loop back diagnosis Caller ID Card DTMF Sending Out Diagnosis DSP DTMF generator/receiver diagnosis DSP DTMF receiver diagnosis Framer IC alarm signal detection diagnosis Framer IC error detection diagnosis CS-INF loop back diagnosis Super frame synchronization diagnosis Caller ID card loop back diagnosis Extension mode setting test CTI-LINK loop back diagnosis IP-GW H.323 call simulate diagnosis LAN loop back diagnosis

PC Programming Manual

IP-EXT16

CTI-LINK

IP-GW16

DHLC

SLC8

CSIF

E&M

OPB

DLC

BRI

DID

PRI

2.5 Utility

To perform a card test 1. From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis. 2. Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
With the KX-TDA30, to perform the EXT-CID path test, set the status of both the EXT-CID card and the card in slot 1 to "OUS".

3. Click on the cell showing the card type.

A new window will be displayed.

4. Select the Card Test option.

A new window will be displayed.

5. Click OK to perform the test(s).

The error report will be displayed. When all tests are completed, the words "Test End!" will be shown on the last line of the output.

6. Select an option:
Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.

1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite. 2. Click Save.

Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.

Pair Port Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Tests the combination of an extension port and trunk port to ensure that communication with the trunk port can be carried out successfully. The pair port test can be carried out using one LCOT or ELCOT card and one DHLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16 or CSLC16 card. Note With the KX-TDA600, the pair of cards to be used for the pair port tests must be installed within the same shelf. The tests that are performed are as follows: Line current OFF (Ext>CO) Line current ON (Ext>CO) Off hook detection (CO>Ext) DTMF detection (CO>Ext) DP detection (CO>Ext) BELL detection (Ext>CO) Speech path (Ext>CO) Speech path (CO>Ext) Line current from extension to trunk turns off. Line current from extension to trunk turns on. Off-hook generation/detection from trunk to extension DTMF generation/detection from trunk to extension DP generation/detection from trunk to extension BELL generation/detection from extension to trunk Speech path from extension to trunk Speech path from trunk to extension

To perform a pair port test 1. From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis. 2. Click on the Status cell of the extension card to be tested, and set it to "OUS". 3. Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

4. Select the Pair Port Test option.

A new window will be displayed. The card you selected in Step 3 will be shown in the Extension Line Slot No. drop-down list.

5. From the CO Line Slot No. drop-down list, select the slot number of the trunk card you want to
test.

6. From the CO Line Port No. drop-down list, select the port number of the trunk you want to test. 7. Click OK.
The error report will be displayed.

8. Select an option:
Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.

1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite. 2. Click Save.

Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.

Network Loopback Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (MPR Software File Version 3.2000 or later)
Performs a remote loopback test on the PRI23 card. Notes

To perform this test, it is necessary to set Loopback Test started by Network (MPR Software File Version 3.2000 or later) in 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600 only) to "Enable". The version of the PRI23 card must be 2.000 or later.

To perform a network loopback test 1. From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis. 2. Click on the Status cell of the PRI23 card, and set it to "OUS". 3. Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.

4. Select the Loopback Type option.

A new window will be displayed.

5. Select Point1 or Point2 depending on the type of loopback test you want to perform.
The available selections may vary depending on the hardware version of the card.

6. Click Apply.
Preparation for the test is complete. The test will start automatically.

7. After the test is complete, select Release and click Apply. 8. Click Close to return to the Diagnosis screen.

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

2.5.2

UtilityFile Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)

Copies PBX system files (program files and data files) from the connected PC to the SD memory card installed in the PBX. Pre-existing files on the SD memory card are overwritten. This option is only available at Installer level. Two types of files can be copied using this tool: Program files: These contain the programs used to operate cards within the PBX and CSs, acting as on-board drivers. Data files: These contain the initial configuration data for individual cards and settings. Not all files that are copied using this tool are automatically made active. To install new program files or main system data to the PBX, use the System ResetReset by the Command utility (see 2.5.17 UtilitySystem ResetReset by the Command) for PMPR/PSMPR/PLMPR and DSYS/DSSYS/ DLSYS files, and the SD Card File View and Load utility (see 2.5.4 UtilitySD Card File View and Load) for all other files. The PBX examines the header information of a file to determine 2 things: whether the file contains supported data, and which system component the file applies to. Only files whose header information matches that of a system file supported by the PBX can be transferred. Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message. The names of all files that can be stored on the SD memory card are as follows:

Main Program
KX-TDA30 Name on SD Memory Card PSMPR PSMPR_S Corresponding Card MPR MPR*

*: PSMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PSMPR_S". KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Name on SD Memory Card PMPR PMPR_SUB Corresponding Card MPR MPR*

*: PMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PMPR_SUB". KX-TDA600 Name on SD Memory Card PLMPR Corresponding Card EMPR

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

KX-TDA600 Name on SD Memory Card PLMPR_S Corresponding Card EMPR*

*: PLMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PLMPR_S".

LPR Program
KX-TDA30 Name on SD Memory Card PE1 PSVOIPEX Corresponding Card E1 IP-EXT4

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 Name on SD Memory Card PCSINF PDHLC PSLC PCSLC PT1 PE1 PEM PBRI PIPGW PIPGWH PIPGW16 PPRI23 PPRI30 POPB3 PCTILINK PDID PIPEXT PVOIPEX PESLC PELCOT PEECHO Corresponding Card CSIF DHLC8/DLC8/DLC16 SLC8 CSLC16 T1 E1 E&M BRI IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480) IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484) IP-GW16 PRI23 PRI30 OPB CTI-LINK DID8 IP-EXT16 IP-EXT16 ESLC16/EMSLC16 (KX-TDA600 only) ELCOT (KX-TDA600 only) EECHO (KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 Name on SD Memory Card PBUSS Corresponding Card BUS-S (KX-TDA600 only)

CS Program
Name on SD Memory Card PCSDECT PDCSDECT PCS24G PDCS24G Corresponding Unit CS for DECT Portable Station (KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600 only) CS for DECT Portable Station CS for 2.4 GHz Portable Station (KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600 only) CS for 2.4 GHz Portable Station

System Data
KX-TDA30 Name on SD Memory Card DSSYS DSSYS_S Corresponding Card MPR MPR*

*: DSSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DSSYS_S". KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Name on SD Memory Card DSYS DSYS_SUB Corresponding Card MPR MPR*

*: DSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DSYS_SUB". KX-TDA600 Name on SD Memory Card DLSYS DLSYS_S Corresponding Card EMPR EMPR*

*: DLSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DLSYS_S".

Language Data
Name on SD Memory Card DLNG0DLNG5 Corresponding Unit PT

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

Name on SD Memory Card DVMLNG1DVMLNG5

Corresponding Unit VPS (Display Guidance data)

Default Value Data

KX-TDA30 Name on SD Memory Card DSINI DSIDHLC DSISLCLC DSIDLC DSIBRI DSILCOT DSIEIO DSIIPGW DSIDID DSIE1 DSIIPEXT KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Name on SD Memory Card DINI DIDHLC DISLC DIDLC DIBRI DICSINF DILCOT DIT1 DIE1 DIEM DIOPB3 DICTILIN DIEIO DIIPGW1 DIIPGW2 DIIPGW3 Corresponding Card MPR DHLC8 SLC8/CSLC16 DLC8/DLC16 BRI CSIF LCOT8/LCOT16 T1 E1 E&M OPB3 CTI-LINK EIO IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480) IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484) IP-GW16 Corresponding Card MPR DHLC4 (Pre-installed super hybrid ports) SLC4/SLC8 DLC4/DLC8 BRI1/BRI2 LCOT2/LCOT4 DPH2/DPH4 IP-GW4 DID3 E1 IP-EXT4

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Name on SD Memory Card DIPRI23 DIPRI30 DISLCLC DIDID DIIPEXT KX-TDA600 Name on SD Memory Card DLINI DLIDHLC DLISLC DLIDLC DLIBRI DLICSINF DLILCOT DLIT1 DLIE1 DLIEM DLIOPB3 DLICTILI DLIEIO DLIIPGW1 DLIIPGW2 DLIIPGW3 DLIPRI23 DLIPRI30 DLIDID DLIIPEXT Corresponding Card EMPR DHLC8 SLC8, EMSLC16, ESLC16 DLC8/DLC16 BRI CSIF ELCOT16 T1 E1 E&M OPB3 CTI-LINK EIO IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480) IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484) IP-GW16 PRI23 PRI30 DID8 IP-EXT16 Corresponding Card PRI23 PRI30 SLC16 DID8 IP-EXT16

To transfer files to the SD memory card 1. From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).
The dialogue box will be displayed.

2. Select the file to upload.

A window showing the upload progress will be displayed.

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

While transferring files to the SD memory card, the PBX automatically renames them according to the header information. A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.

3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

2.5.3

UtilityFile Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC

Copies system data files from the SD memory card installed in the PBX to the connected PC. This option is only available at Installer level. The files that can be downloaded from the SD memory card are as follows: File Name DSSYS (KX-TDA30) DSYS (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) DLSYS (KX-TDA600) $SYSERR $SYSERR1$SYSERR9 DSKEYSD (KX-TDA30) DKEYSD (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) DLKEYSD (KX-TDA600) Feature Restriction File Type System Data

Error Data

Downloading the DSYS/DSSYS/DLSYS system data file allows you to make a backup of the configuration of the PBX. The error data files are snapshots of the configuration of the PBX taken automatically when a major error causes a system reset. They can be analysed by your dealer to identify the source of a problem. If there is only one error data file, its name will be $SYSERR. If there is more than one file, the files will be numbered in chronological order, up to a maximum of 9 files.

To transfer files to the PC 1. From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC. 2. Select the file to download from the list of files on the SD memory card.
Only the files listed in the table above can be downloaded. Selecting any other file will cause an error message to be displayed.

3. Click Transfer.
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.

4. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file. 5. Enter a file name. 6. Click Save.
A window showing the download progress will be displayed. A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.

7. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

2.5.4

UtilitySD Card File View and Load

Displays a list of files on the SD memory card, and allows you to update the programs stored in LPR cards (cards with local processors) and Cell Stations (CSs). This option is only available at Installer level. To update the program stored in an LPR card, the card must first be set to out of service (OUS). To update the program stored in a CS, the port of the card (CSIF/DHLC/DLC) that the CS is attached to must be set to OUS, but the card itself must be set to in service (INS). Only cards that are in the correct status will be displayed. The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed.

To view and load files on the SD memory card 1. From the Utility menu, select SD Card File View and Load. 2. Click on the name of the file whose information you want to view.
Only files containing program data (whose filenames start with "P") can be selected.

3. Click Detail.
The Detail screen will be displayed. Header information from the chosen SD memory card file is displayed on the left.

4. From the Card drop-down list on the right, select the card(s) whose software you want to update.
To update a specific card or port: LPR cards: select the slot number and card name. CSs: select the slot number and card name, and then select the related CS port from the drop-down list directly below. To update all matching cards simultaneously: Select "ALL".

5. Click View to update the displayed header information of the selected files.
The file with the higher File Version and File Revision numbers is newer.

6. Click Load to update the file stored on the PBX.

When the update is finished, a message will be displayed.

7. Click OK.
The display will return to the Detail screen.

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

2.5.5

UtilitySD Card File Delete

Allows you to delete files from the SD memory card. This option is only available at Installer level. The following essential system files cannot be deleted by this utility: KX-TDA30: PSMPR, DSSYS, DSKEYSD KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: PMPR, DSYS, DKEYSD KX-TDA600: PLMPR, DLSYS, DLKEYSD

Description The 5-digit sub code of the relevant hardware. (XYYZZ) X: Shelf number KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1 KX-TDA600: 1: Basic Shelf 2: Expansion Shelf 1 3: Expansion Shelf 2 4: Expansion Shelf 3 YY: Slot number KX-TDA30: 00 to 11 (00: MPR slot; 01: Fixed slot, 02 to 04: Free slot type A, 05 to 07: Free slot type B, 08 to 11: Option slot) KX-TDA100: 00 to 06 (00: MPR slot; 01 to 06: Free slot) KX-TDA200: 00 to 11 (00: MPR slot; 01 to 11: Free slot) KX-TDA600: Basic Shelf: 00 to 10 (00: EMPR Card Slot; 01 to 10: Free Slots) Expansion Shelf: 01 to 12 (01 to 11: Free Slots; 12: BUS-S Card Slot) ZZ: Physical port number (01 to 16) For OPB3 card, sub slot number (1 to 3) + port number (1 to 4) will be displayed as follows: Sub slot 1 of OPB3: 11 to 14 Sub slot 2 of OPB3: 21 to 24 Sub slot 3 of OPB3: 31 to 34 A description of the error.

Error Message

To view the error log

From the Utility menu, select Error Log.

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

2.5.9

UtilityT1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600) / E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KXTDA30)
Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of the T1 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600 only) or E1 card, by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status. While monitoring is being performed, any displayed bits whose value changes from 0 to 1 or vice versa will be highlighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed.

To view signalling bit information 1. From the Utility menu, select T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600) or E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA30).

2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot. 3. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic
screen refresh.

4. Click Start.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.

5. Click Stop to end monitoring.

To refresh the screen at any time while monitoring is stopped, click Refresh.

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

2.5.10 UtilityT1/E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600) / E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA30)
Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the T1 (KXTDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) or E1 line. This utility is intended for use by dealers. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.

To view trace data 1. From the Utility menu, select T1/E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or E1
Line Trace (for KX-TDA30).

2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot. 3. From the CH No drop-down list, select the target channel. 4. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed. The information is automatically updated whenever the data being monitored changes.

5. Click Stop to end the trace. 6. Select an option:

Click Capture to save the displayed trace information. Information is saved as a text-format file. Click Clear to erase the information.

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

2.5.11 UtilityISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace

This utility collects protocol trace data from BRI, PRI or IP-GW cards, and displays it on the PC. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target BRI, PRI or IP-GW card be set to INS status. Protocol trace data is continually accumulated on ISDN and IP-GW cards, and 3 types of data can be downloaded: Real Time Trace (not available when connected via LAN): Pseudo-real-time data is collected through data polling at one-second intervals. The displayed information is updated beginning when the Start button is clicked. Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated data is retrieved and displayed. Error Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed. This trace shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets.

To view trace data 1. From the Utility menu, select ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace. 2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot. 3. From the Trace Data Type drop-down list, select the type of data to view. 4. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed.

5. Select an option:
Click Capture to save the displayed trace information. Click Clear to clear the screen display.

6. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

2.5.12 UtilityDigital Trunk Error Report

Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks. This option is only available at Installer level. The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period selected. Average values for these items vary depending upon many factors, such as the equipment being used, and the distance from the telephone company. The displayed items are as follows: Item Time Slot Counter of Digital Trunk Out of SYNC (#300) Error Logs logged in RAI (#301) Minor Error Log AIS (#302) Frame Failure (#300) Counter of minor communication error CRC SF FE LV SL Description Time of error Relevant slot and card type Digital trunk out of sync (Loss of Signal) Digital trunk RAI signal reception Digital trunk Alarm Indication Signal reception Digital trunk frame failure (Loss of Frame) Cyclic Redundancy Check error Severely errored frame (or Severe Framing Error) Frame synchronisation bit-error Line Code Violation Controlled slip

To view digital trunk information 1. From the Utility menu, select Digital Trunk Error Report. 2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
To generate a report on a specific card, select the slot number and card name. To generate a report on all matching cards simultaneously, select "ALL".

3. From the Display form drop-down list, select the time period to view. 4. Click Execute.
The error report will be displayed.

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

2.5.13 UtilityIP Extension Statistical Information

Displays accumulated statistical information on both IP extensions and IP-EXT cards. The displayed items are as follows: Item Collection Started Time Port RTP Receive Packet Counter RTP Receive Lost Packet Counter RTP Receive Abandoned Packet Counter RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MAX.) [ms] RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MIN.) [ms] Description Date and time the port was last reset. Number of the port. Total number of packets received. Total number of packets lost. Total number of packets abandoned. Maximum time taken for a packet to arrive. Minimum time taken for a packet to arrive.

To view IP extension information 1. From the Utility menu, select IP Extension Statistical Information. 2. From the Card Selection drop-down list, select the slot number. 3. Click Execute.
The statistical information will be displayed.

4. Select an option:
Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.

1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite. 2. Click Save.

Click Clear to erase the information and reset the Collection Started Time.

5. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

2.5.14 UtilityCS Information

Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS). This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target CSIF, DHLC or DLC card be set to INS status. The displayed items are as follows: Item Shelf-Slot Port CS Name Status Description Number of the slot (for KX-TDA600, shelf and slot) Number of the port Name of the attached CS Service status of the attached CS: INS, OUS, or FAULT. If the status is FAULT, subsequent data items for that port will be left blank. Version number of the program file stored in the CS Revision number of the program file stored in the CS 12-digit ID number of the CS Number of the wireless extension currently using each path. In the case of a group, several extensions may be using the same floating extension number. When an extension number is not registered, the display shows "OFF". 2.4 GHz PSs can use up to 3 paths (KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600) or 2 paths (KX-TDA30). DECT PSs can use up to 4 paths (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or 2 paths (KX-TDA30). Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a PS Ring Group.

Version Revision CSID Path

Group Call

To view CS information 1. From the Utility menu, select CS Information. 2. From the Target CSI/F Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
To display information on a single card, select the slot number and name of that card. To display information on all matching cards, select "ALL".

3. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic
screen refresh.

4. Click Start to begin monitoring.

Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified. To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.

5. Click Stop to end monitoring.

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

2.5.15 UtilityPS Information

Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS). This option is only available at Installer level. The displayed items are as follows: Item PS No. Extension Number LocationSlot LocationPort Description PS location number. Only registered PSs will be displayed. Extension number of the PS. Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with. Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with.

To view PS information 1. From the Utility menu, select PS Information. 2. Click Refresh.

PC Programming Manual

2.5 Utility

2.5.16 UtilityTimed Update

Updates programs in the LPR cards (optional service cards with local processors) by comparing them with files found on the SD memory card on a preset schedule, and downloading newer files to the cards. This option is only available at Installer level. It is recommended to set the timed update to take place during the least active time period, for example late at night. Cards are automatically set to OUS status during an update, and returned to INS status when the update is complete. This utility does not apply to CS programs. These must be updated manually using the SD Card File View and Load utility (see 2.5.4 UtilitySD Card File View and Load). When this utility has been set, all commands that would affect the status of cards are prevented from operating. The list of these commands is as follows: Card status change (INS/OUS) Diagnosis commands Card installation Card deletion Remote reset LPR program download requests ISDN automatic setup requests (BRI card) Signalling Bit Monitor requests (T1/E1) Line trace start requests (T1/E1) ISDN/QSIG Protocol Data Trace start requests Time setting CS program download requests File deletion When a function other than those listed above, that cannot be performed while Timed Update has been set, is selected, an error message will be displayed.

To turn this utility on: 1. From the Utility menu, select Timed Update. 2. Select the Set option.
The time setting box will become available.

3. Enter the desired time using the number keys.

Click in the hour or minute field and use the up and down arrows to adjust the displayed time in increments of one unit.

4. Click Apply.
A message box will be displayed.

5. Click OK. To turn this utility off: 1. From the Utility menu, select Timed Update.
PC Programming Manual 95

Connection
Q A

Q A

How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards?

From 2.7.1 [1-1] Slot, click Summary. Summary information, including software versions, is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.

Q A

Not all of the characters of a setting can be displayed because the column is too narrow.
Move the mouse to the line between the names of 2 setting items, at the top of the table. The pointer will change to a double arrow. Click and drag the line to the right until all characters are displayed.

Card Status
Q A

The status of a new card will not change to "INS".

With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or trunks exceed the maximum supported by the PBX? Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-install" for that slot? Confirm that the correct card is installed in the slot. Is the card firmly and fully installed in the slot? Confirm that the card is installed correctly in the slot. Confirm that the card is not damaged.

Q A

I want to set the status of only 1 port of the IP-GW4 card to "OUS".
This cannot be done, since the IP-GW4 card requires both channels of a port to be set to "OUS"/"INS" together.

I cannot change an LCO port to INS status.

PC Programming Manual

101

2.6 Help

Is the card installed in the appropriate slot? Is the card installed in the correct slot, but not functioning correctly? Check the condition of the card. Is the card itself in INS status? Set it to INS status. Is a trunk line connected to the appropriate port? Is the port in FAULT status, even though a trunk is connected? Run diagnosis on the relevant slot.

There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain:

1. Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit. This method allows
a maximum of 10 extensions. Example: Leading Number = 10; No. of Additional Digits = x In this example, extension numbers 100 to 109 can be used.

2. Set the leading number to be one digit, with 2 additional digits. This method allows
a maximum of 100 extensions. Example: Leading Number = 1; No. of Additional Digits = xx In this example, extension numbers 100 to 199 can be used. For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?. Q

What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?

PC Programming Manual

103

2.6 Help

Perform the following steps:

1. Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by any
extensions (see 2.4.7 ToolExtension List View). If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of those extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension number (see 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings and 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings).

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Clear the Leading Number cell. Click Apply. Modify the No. of Additional Digits cell as required. Click Apply. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell. Click Apply. Set all extension ports to OUS status. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired values.

10. Set all extension ports back to INS status.

Q A

When modifying the Numbering Plan, I cannot change the Leading Number.
It is not possible to use the same Leading Number for 2 extension blocks, or to use a number that could possibly overlap with another Leading Number. So, for example, if "2" is already set as a Leading Number it is not possible to set "21" as another Leading Number because of the possible overlap of extension numbers. The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by: A feature number Another extension block A Dial setting (see 2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table) Quick Dialling (see 2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering PlanQuick Dial) In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q A

When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number?
Perform the following steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Clear the Leading Number cell. Click Apply. Set No. of Additional Digits to "None". Click Apply. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell. Click Apply. Set all extension ports to OUS status. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired values.

9. Set all extension ports back to INS status.

How do I change a feature number?

104

PC Programming Manual

2.6 Help

Perform the following steps:

1. Open the 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain screen. 2. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature. 3. Click Apply.
Q A

I cannot change a feature number.

It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items. The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by: A feature number An extension A Dial setting (see 2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table) Quick Dialling (see 2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering PlanQuick Dial) In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q A

How do I change the code used to access another PBX?

Perform the following steps:

1. 2. 3. 4.
Q A

Open the 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain screen. Select the Other PBX Extension tab. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature. Click Apply.

I cannot change an Other PBX Extension code.

Q A

I cannot change a feature number on the B/NA DND Call Feature screen.
The number you are trying to store is already being used by another call feature. Please choose a different number.

Q A

How do I prevent extension numbers being automatically assigned to a newly installed card?
Change New Card InstallationAutomatic Extension Number Set for Extension Card in the 2.7.48 [1-3] Option screen from "Automatic" to "Manual".

Saving Modified Data

Q A Q A

Modified settings have not been updated in the PBX.

Click Apply or OK in the sub-menu screen.

Modified settings are not saved even when I press the Apply button.
To save the system data files, choose Save from the File menu.

PC Programming Manual

105

2.6 Help

Q A

If I reset the PBX directly after modifying settings, the modified settings are not updated in the PBX.
When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to the SD memory card. If system data is not saved to the SD memory card, the PBX will restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset, or power is turned off and back on again. Therefore, before resetting the PBX, click the SD memory backup icon to save the system data to the SD memory card. Alternatively, exit the Maintenance Console. This automatically saves system data to the SD memory card.

Note Do not remove the SD memory card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may cause the Hybrid IP-PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system. Q

After reinitialising the PBX, I restored system data from a previous backup. However, some of the settings have not been restored to their previous values.

106

PC Programming Manual

2.6 Help

The following setting data is not saved to the SD memory card, so will be deleted when the PBX is initialised. This data is stored in the PBX's battery backup memory. Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log (including Last Number Redial) Message Waiting SMDR Advice of Charge (AOC)/Pay Tone Hospitality guest billing data ICD Group monitor log for supervisor PBX date and time Timed Reminder LPR Timed Update time Daily test start time PT handset/headset volume PT SP-PHONE volume PT ring volume PT display contrast ICD Group login status (All extensions are set to Login by default.) ICD Group Ready/Not Ready status (All extensions are set to Ready by default.) Live Call Screening (LCS) On/Off Hands-free Answerback status Absent Message status of extensions (Absent Message data itself is not cleared.) FWD/DND status (FWD destinations are not cleared.) Extension Dial Lock/Remote Extension Dial Lock Extension PIN Lock/Extension PIN Lock counter Verification Code PIN Lock/Verification Code PIN Lock counter Password Lock counter for Remote System Programming PBX Error Log Digital Trunk Error Report data In addition, the following data cannot be restored: SVM Log and messages (both greeting messages and voice messages left by callers) recorded in an SVM card (KX-TDA30 only)

Setting Features
Q A

How do I change the dialling mode of an analogue trunk?

From the 2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port screen, change the Dialling Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF" or "Pulse", as required.

How do I set disconnect detection (CPC Detection) for an analogue trunk?

PC Programming Manual

107

2.6 Help

From the 2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port screen, modify the CPC Signal Detection TimeOutgoing, Incoming setting of the target port. The required value varies by carrier. Transmission and reception can be set separately.

Q A

What settings do I change to enable use of an extension ISDN telephone?

It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT using the SLT SLT Hold Mode option on the 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options screen. For more details, see "1.13.1 Call Hold" of the Feature Guide.

Q A

How do I set up an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group to receive trunk calls directly?
Perform the following steps:

1. On the 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings screen,

enter the floating extension number you chose for the ICD group in the Floating Extension Number cell.

2. Click Apply. 3. On the 2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMember screen, select
the ICD group you created from the Incoming Call Distribution drop-down list.

4. Enter the extension numbers of member extensions in the Extension Number

column.

5. Click Apply. 6. On the DIL tab of the 2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings screen, enter the
floating extension number of the ICD group as the DIL DestinationDay, Lunch, Break, Night of each time mode.

7. Modify other settings as required from the GroupIncoming Call Distribution

Group submenu. Q A

How do I set the queuing operation for an Incoming Call Distribution group?
Perform the following steps:

1. On the 2.9.11 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution GroupQueuing Time Table

screen, set the actions as required for each queuing table.

2. On the 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings screen,

from the Queuing Time Table tab, select the number of the Queuing Time Table to use in each time mode.

PC Programming Manual

109

2.6 Help

Q A

How do I add an extension as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group?

Perform the following steps:

1. On the 2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMember screen, from

the Incoming Call Distribution drop-down list, select the group you want to modify. The ICD group must have an extension number set.

2. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of the
Extension Number column.

3. Set Delayed Ring as necessary. 4. Click Apply.

Note that it is necessary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance. Q A

I cannot set system speed dialling numbers from PC Console.

Set the COS of the extension to which PC Console is connected to Manager class, by setting Manager on the Extension Feature tab of the 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service COS Settings screen to "Enable". System speed dialling numbers can only be edited by one PC Console at a time.

Q A

I have set FWD through system programming, but calls are still not being forwarded.
Perform the following steps:

1. Check that the Call from COPresent Button Status or Call from Extension
Present Button Status of the target extension on the 2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND or 2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND screen is set to "FWD".

2. Create a FWD button on the target extension if one does not already exist. 3. Press the FWD button so that it changes to FWD status.

110

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7
2.7.1

[1] Configuration
[1-1] Slot
The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed. Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary of status and MPR versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button (see 2.7.2 [1-1] SlotSummary).

To install a new card to the PBX

1. Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right.
An image of the card will be displayed to the left of the list, and information about the card will be shown below.

2. Click and drag the image of the card to the free slot it is to be installed in, and release it.
The card will move into the slot space.

3. Click Yes to confirm.

To install a new shelf to the PBX (KX-TDA600 only)

1. Move the mouse pointer over the first greyed PBX image at the bottom of the screen.
Pre-Install will be shown under the mouse pointer.

2. Click Pre-Install. 3. Click Yes to confirm.

To select a different shelf of the PBX (KX-TDA600 only)

1. Move the mouse pointer over the white PBX image at the bottom of the screen you wish to select.
Select Shelf will be shown under the mouse pointer.

2. Click Select Shelf.

To access card properties

1. Move the mouse pointer over a card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.

2. Select Card Property.

The property screen for that card will be displayed.

To access port properties

1. Move the mouse pointer over a card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.

2. Select Port Property.

The property screen for that card's port or ports will be displayed.

To remove a card from the PBX

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card to remove.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.

2. Select Delete Card.

PC Programming Manual

111

2.7 [1] Configuration

3. Click Yes to confirm.

The card will be removed.

To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (Interactive mode only)

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.

2. Select the desired status:

Click INS to set the card to in-service status. Click OUS to set the card to out-of-service status.

To install an option card on an OPB3 card

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.

2. Select Option Card.

The OPB3 Option Card Setup screen will be displayed. See 2.7.43 [1-1] SlotOPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only).

Supported Card Types

KX-TDA30 Card MPR: Main Processing Card DHLC4: Pre-installed Super Hybrid Ports DLC4: 4-Port Digital Extension Card SLC4: 4-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card BRI1: 1-Port BRI Card BRI2: 2-Port BRI Card LCOT2: 2-Port Analogue Trunk Card LCOT4: 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card DID3: 3-Port DID Card DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card E1: E-1 Trunk Card IP-GW4: 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card IP-EXT4: 4-Channel VoIP Extension Card SIP-GW4: 4-Channel SIP Trunk Card 2 1 1 1 1 0507 (Type B Slots) 2.7.4 [1-1] SlotExtension Card Property 2.7.21 [1-1] SlotE1 Card Property 2.7.33 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Card Property 2.7.36 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card Property 2.7.39 [1-1] SlotSIP-GW Card Property (KX-TDA30 only) 2.7.30 [1-1] SlotDID Card Property 3 2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property 1 Maximum Quantity 1 1 Supported Slot Numbers 00 01 2.7.4 [1-1] SlotExtension Card Property Card Programming 2.7.3 [1-1] SlotMPR Card Property

0204 (Type A Slots)

2.7.13 [1-1] SlotBRI/PRI Card Property

112

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

KX-TDA30 Card DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card 1 DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card MSG2: 2-Channel Message Card ECHO8: 8-Channel Echo Canceller Card EXT-CID: Extension Caller ID Card SVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card 2 1 1 2 0811 (Option Slots) None Maximum Quantity Supported Slot Numbers 0809 (Option Slots) Card Programming 2.7.45 [1-1] SlotDPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

For more information on cards and card installation, see "1.3.1 Optional Equipment" in the KX-TDA30 Installation Manual.

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Card MPR: Main Processing Card DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card CSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Caller ID IP-EXT16: 16-Channel VoIP Extension Card CSIF4: 4 Cell Station Interface Card CSIF8: 8 Cell Station Interface Card LCOT4: 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card LCOT8: 8-Port Analogue Trunk Card LCOT16: 16-Port Analogue Trunk Card DID8: 8-Port DID Card KX-TDA100: 6 KX-TDA200: 8 2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property KX-TDA100: 4 KX-TDA200: 4 2.7.36 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card Property None KX-TDA100: 6 KX-TDA200: 8 2.7.4 [1-1] SlotExtension Card Property Maximum Quantity 1 (fixed in Slot 00) Card Programming 2.7.3 [1-1] SlotMPR Card Property

2.7.30 [1-1] SlotDID Card Property

PC Programming Manual

113

2.7 [1] Configuration

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Card BRI4: 4-Port BRI Card BRI8: 8-Port BRI Card PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels) PRI30: PRI Card (30B channels) T1: T-1 Trunk Card KX-TDA100: 4 KX-TDA200: 4 2.7.18 [1-1] SlotT1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.7.21 [1-1] SlotE1 Card Property KX-TDA100: 6 KX-TDA200: 8 KX-TDA100: 4 KX-TDA200: 4 KX-TDA100: 4 KX-TDA200: 4 KX-TDA100: 1 KX-TDA200: 1 2.7.27 [1-1] SlotE&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.7.33 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Card Property 2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.7.44 [1-1] SlotCTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600 only) Maximum Quantity KX-TDA100: 6 KX-TDA200: 8 Card Programming

2.7.13 [1-1] SlotBRI/PRI Card Property

E1: E-1 Trunk Card E&M8: 8-Port E & M Trunk Card

IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480/KX-TDA0484): 4Channel VoIP Gateway Card IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card

For more information on cards and card installation, see "1.3.1 Optional Equipment" in the KXTDA100/KX-TDA200 Installation Manual.

KX-TDA600 Card EMPR: Main Processing Card DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card EMSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card ESLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card IP-EXT16: 16-Channel VoIP Extension Card 2.7.36 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card Property 2.7.4 [1-1] SlotExtension Card Property 40 Maximum Quantity 1 (fixed in Slot 11) Card Programming 2.7.3 [1-1] SlotMPR Card Property

114

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

KX-TDA600 Card CSIF4: 4 Cell Station Interface Card 16 CSIF8: 8 Cell Station Interface Card ELCOT16: 16-Port Analogue Trunk Card DID8: 8-Port DID Card BRI4: 4-Port BRI Card 40 BRI8: 8-Port BRI Card PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels) PRI30: PRI Card (30B channels) T1: T-1 Trunk Card 20 2.7.18 [1-1] SlotT1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.7.21 [1-1] SlotE1 Card Property 40 IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480): 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484): 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card 16 2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.7.27 [1-1] SlotE&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.7.13 [1-1] SlotBRI/PRI Card Property 40 40 2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property 2.7.30 [1-1] SlotDID Card Property None Maximum Quantity Card Programming

E1: E-1 Trunk Card E&M8: 8-Port E & M Trunk Card

20 2.7.33 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Card Property 40

2.7.44 [1-1] SlotCTI-LINK Card 1 (can only be installed in Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXthe Basic Shelf) TDA600 only) 8 None

EECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card

For more information on cards and card installation, see "1.3.1 Optional Equipment" in the KXTDA600 Installation Manual.

PC Programming Manual

115

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.2

[1-1] SlotSummary
Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX. For the KX-TDA600, when the PBX has more than two shelves, click a tab to select the shelves to view.

No.
Indicates the slot number (reference only).

Value Range
Available slot numbers.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.2 [1-1] SlotSummary

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

Card Type
Indicates the type of service card installed in each slot of the PBX (reference only). Note that for MPR cards, the PBX model code is displayed in parentheses after the name.

Feature Guide References

SLT Off Hook Guard Time

Specifies the length of guard time used for off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the PBX mistaking them for pulse dials.

Value Range
8 n (n=1263) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] SlotExtension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

SLT Pulse Maximum Break Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 n (n=920) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] SlotExtension Card Property

Programming Manual References

SLT Flash Detection

Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal sent when an SLT user presses the hookswitch or the Flash/Recall button.

Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the line to prevent placing the call on hold. Enable: The PBX places the call on consultation hold.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] SlotExtension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.3 Call Splitting

Flash Timing - Min.

Specifies the minimum length that a signal sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch flash signal.

Value Range
8 n (n=363) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] SlotExtension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flash Timing - Range

Specifies the maximum length that a signal sent from an SLT can be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch flash signal.

Value Range
8 n (n=3191) ms

124

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] SlotExtension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone

126

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.5

[1-1] SlotExtension Port

Various settings can be programmed for each extension port. To change the status of extension ports, click Command. To view total numbers of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

PC Programming Manual

127

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration

Port Type
Indicates the port type (reference only).

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration

Telephone Type
Indicates the connected telephone type (reference only). The number of all connected telephones and Cell Stations can be viewed by clicking Port Type View.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.7 [1-1] SlotExtension PortPort Type View

Feature Guide References

2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration

128

None

Feature Guide References

None

XDP Mode (for S-Hybrid port)

Turns XDP mode on or off for the port.

Value Range
On: XDP enabled (The main telephone and sub telephone have different extension numbers. This is called XDP Mode.) Off: XDP disabled (The main telephone and sub telephone both have the main telephone's extension number. This is called Parallel Mode.)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration

Parallel Telephone Ringing (for S-Hybrid port)

Specifies whether the sub telephone (SLT) rings at the same time as the main telephone (DPT) for an incoming call.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone

130

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

DPT TypeType (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)

Value Range
For KX-TDA30: 14 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: 112

132

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Headset OFF/ON (for DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, or S-Hybrid(S-DPT) port)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.6 [1-1] SlotExtension PortPort Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.6 [1-1] SlotExtension PortPort Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Feature Guide References

None

134

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.7

[1-1] SlotExtension PortPort Type View

Displays the number of connected telephones and Cell Stations (CSs). This screen can only be accessed in Interactive mode.

Type
Indicates the types of telephone (reference only).

Value Range
New-DPT (KX-T7600 series DPTs), Old-DPT (DPTs other than KX-T7600 series), APT, SLT, DSS Console, VM, Other, CS, IP-EXT

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.7 [1-1] SlotExtension PortPort Type View

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Total Count
Indicates the total number of each type of telephone and CS connected to the PBX (reference only). With the KX-TDA30, CSs are counted on the basis of the number of extension ports to which they are connected; with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600, CSs are counted on the basis of the number of CSIF ports in service plus the number of extension ports to which CSs are connected.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.7 [1-1] SlotExtension PortPort Type View

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port 2.7.8 [1-1] SlotCSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

135

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.8

[1-1] SlotCSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

The status of the CSIF ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in-service) or OUS (out-of-service). To change the status of ports, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

2.7.8 [1-1] SlotCSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

136

PC Programming Manual

2.7.9

[1-1] SlotCSI/F PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Commands for the CSIF ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the Cell Station (CS) in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.9 [1-1] SlotCSI/F PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.8 [1-1] SlotCSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the CS out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the CS, for example, for the purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.9 [1-1] SlotCSI/F PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.8 [1-1] SlotCSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

138

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property

The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified.

Outgoing Guard Time

Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
36 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

First Dial Timer (CO)

Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a trunk, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
0.5 n (n=116) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CO Feed Back Tone

Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.

Value Range
No, Yes

PC Programming Manual

None

Pulse / DTMF DialPulse Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Low Speed Pulse DialPulse % Break

Specifies the % break for a low speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
Other, 60 %, 67 %

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

141

2.7 [1] Configuration

Low Speed Pulse DialBreak Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
4 n (n=620) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

High Speed Pulse DialBreak Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse DialPulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
4 n (n=418) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port

Feature Guide References

None

High Speed Pulse DialMake Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
4 n (n=315) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.

Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property

PC Programming Manual

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller IDMax Receive Time

Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network.

Value Range
0 (no limit), 1, 2, 3

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property

144

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller IDCaller ID (FSK) Header Examination

Enables the PBX to check the header of received Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller IDCaller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series. Start Code 1 is prior to Start Code 2.

146

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller IDCaller ID (DTMF) Information Start Code

Specifies the signal strength of the pay tone.

148

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7 [1] Configuration

Pay TonePay Tone Pulse - Interval (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the maximum length of time between pay tone signals.

Value Range
8 n (n=1250) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services

Pay ToneSending Flash while end talk (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600 only)

Enables the PBX to send a flash signal at the end of call to demand a pay tone signal.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services

150

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port

Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port. To change the status of ports, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port

PC Programming Manual

151

2.7 [1] Configuration

Busy Out Status

Indicates the Busy Out status (reference only).

Value Range
Normal, Busy Out

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

Dialling Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the analogue trunk.

Value Range
DTMF, Pulse
152 PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

CPC Signal Detection TimeOutgoing, Incoming

Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected.

Value Range
None, 6.5 ms, 8 n (n=1112) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the analogue trunk.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the analogue trunk.

PC Programming Manual

1.18.1 Caller ID

154

None

PC Programming Manual

155

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

156

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.12 [1-1] SlotLCO PortPort Command

Commands for the LCO ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the port in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.12 [1-1] SlotLCO PortPort Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.12 [1-1] SlotLCO PortPort Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

157

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.13 [1-1] SlotBRI/PRI Card Property

The properties of the BRI or PRI (available with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) card can be specified.

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG SlaveT200

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.

Value Range
0600 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] SlotBRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG SlaveT202

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the request to use an ISDN line as a TIE line.

Value Range
0600 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] SlotBRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG SlaveT301

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.

Value Range
018000 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] SlotBRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG SlaveT302

Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.

Value Range
0600 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] SlotBRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG SlaveT303

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to ISDN.

Value Range
0600 100 ms

PC Programming Manual

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG SlaveT309

Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.

Value Range
03000 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] SlotBRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG SlaveT310

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message.

Value Range
03000 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] SlotBRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

161

None

162

PC Programming Manual

None

PC Programming Manual

163

2.7 [1] Configuration

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG SlaveT3D9

Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

ISDN ExtensionT203
Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.

Value Range
0600 100 ms

2.7 [1] Configuration

ISDN ExtensionT303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to ISDN.

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN ExtensionT306
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN. This setting is used when inband tones are supplied.

2.7.13 [1-1] SlotBRI/PRI Card Property

PC Programming Manual

167

2.7 [1] Configuration

ISDN ExtensionT312
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to ISDN.

Value Range
0600 100 ms

168

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

PC Programming Manual

169

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port. To change the status of ports, click Command.

Main
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

PC Programming Manual

171

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY 1.30.4.1 QSIG Standard FeaturesSUMMARY

Value Range
INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

172

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Status Receive
Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status of the call.

PC Programming Manual

173

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network. Disconnect: Disconnect the call.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO
Parameters for ISDN CO are not applicable for the BRI extension port.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Value Range
INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

PC Programming Manual

175

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.15 [1-1] SlotBRI PortPort Command

Feature Guide References

None

Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Ringback Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY

BRI Data Link (P-MP) Mode

Assigns one or two TEIs (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) to the BRI CO port. To use the ISDN Hold supplementary service with point-to-multipoint configuration, this parameter should be set to 2-link in some countries/areas.

Value Range
1-link: One TEI is assigned to the BRI CO port. 2-link: Two TEIs are assigned to the BRI CO port. (Available when Access Mode on the Network tab is set to P-MP.)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual

177

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Networking Data Transfer

Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master. A maximum of two ports of each BRI card can be assigned to transmit extension status information.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

2.15 [9] Private Network

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

ISDN Extension
Parameters for ISDN Extension are not applicable for BRI ports assigned as CO ports.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

178

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00)

Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00".

Value Range
Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN. Ring an Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

180

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

ISDN Extension Progress Tone

Enables the PBX to send call progress tones to the ISDN extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

Network
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

PC Programming Manual

181

2.7 [1] Configuration

PC Programming Manual

183

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY

L2 Mode
Selects the active mode of L2 (Layer 2) on the BRI port.

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

184

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY

Network Numbering Plan

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

PC Programming Manual

185

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.15 [1-1] SlotBRI PortPort Command

186

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Trunk Property (for CO port)

Selects the trunk property of the port.

Value Range
Public: Public network VPN: Virtual Private Network

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service 1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Calling Party numberNumbering Plan IDPublic, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

Called Party numberNumbering Plan IDPublic, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Called Party numberType of NumberPublic, Private

Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Supplementary Service
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

188

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Value Range
INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.15 [1-1] SlotBRI PortPort Command

Feature Guide References

None

COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used. When using the Centralised VM feature, set CF (Rerouting) to "No".

Value Range
For COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E: No, Yes For 3PTY: No, Yes-3Pty

190

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

PC Programming Manual

191

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: Click the desired cell in the column.
192 PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.15 [1-1] SlotBRI PortPort Command

Feature Guide References

None

CCBS Type
Selects the type of the call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) feature, from which the specified number of digits are deleted. CCBS delete digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number.

Value Range
ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

CCBS delete digits

Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type initiated by the CCBS feature from the network. CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of call.

Value Range
015

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual

193

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

194

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.15 [1-1] SlotBRI PortPort Command

Commands for the BRI ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the port in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.15 [1-1] SlotBRI PortPort Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.15 [1-1] SlotBRI PortPort Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

195

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port.

Main
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

196

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Selects the port type. Notes

Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY 1.30.4.1 QSIG Standard FeaturesSUMMARY

Value Range
INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

PC Programming Manual

197

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7 [1] Configuration

CRC4 Mode
Enables the use of CRC4 for error checking. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is an error checking control technique that uses a specific binary prime divisor that results in a unique remainder. It is usually a 16- to 32-bit character. (Assignable only when using the PRI30 card.)

Feature Guide References

None

CO Setting
CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in Port Type.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

200

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.17 [1-1] SlotPRI PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual

201

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Ring Back Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Outgoing Call Type

Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network.

Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires. Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

202

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY

ISDN Centrex
Enables the use of the telephone company's ISDN Centrex Service features.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY

Networking Data Transfer

Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.15 [9] Private Network

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Loopback Test started by Network (MPR Software File Version 3.2000 or later)
Enables a loopback test started from the network side, to be performed on the PRI23 card.

PC Programming Manual

203

2.7 [1] Configuration

Note The version of the PRI23 card must be 2.000 or later.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

Network Loopback Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (MPR Software File Version 3.2000 or later)

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Setting
Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

204

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Selects the type of the port. Notes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: Click the desired cell in the column.

PC Programming Manual

205

2.7 [1] Configuration

Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.17 [1-1] SlotPRI PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00)

Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00".

Value Range
Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN. Ring an Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

Network Configuration
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

206

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Value Range
INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.17 [1-1] SlotPRI PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

Network Type
Selects the network type of the port.

Value Range
056 (2 UK (Domestic), 5 Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN (Standard), 14 France (Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US National ISDN 2)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

208

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY

Network Numbering Plan

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

210

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Trunk Property (for CO port)

Selects the trunk property of the port.

Value Range
Public: Public network VPN: Virtual Private Network

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service 1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Calling Party numberNumbering Plan IDPublic, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

Called Party numberNumbering Plan IDPublic, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Called Party numberType of NumberPublic, Private

Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Supplementary Service
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

212

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

216

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.17 [1-1] SlotPRI PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Commands for the PRI ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the port in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.17 [1-1] SlotPRI PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.17 [1-1] SlotPRI PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

217

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.18 [1-1] SlotT1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600 only)

The properties of the T1 card can be specified.

Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of T1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) used.

Selects the values for C-bit and D-bit. To enable this setting, Frame Sequence on this screen should be set to ESF.

Value Range
C=A, D=B; C=0, D=0; C=0, D=1; C=1, D=0; C=1, D=1

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] SlotT1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

218

None

Feature Guide References

None

First Dial Timer (CO)

Value Range
0.5 n (n=116) s

PC Programming Manual

None

DTMF ToneDTMF Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
64 + 16 n (n=011) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] SlotT1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DTMF ToneDTMF Transmit

Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be transmitted.

None

Pulse DialPulse % Break

Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
60 %, 67 %

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] SlotT1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse DialPulse Type

Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.

Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] SlotT1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

222

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Pulse DialPulse Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 n (n=920) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] SlotT1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual

223

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse DialMinimum MAKE Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 n (n=15) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] SlotT1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

FlashFlash Width (OPX)

Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an SLT connected to an OPX that the PBX can recognise as a hookswitch flash signal.

Value Range
8 n (n=3191) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] SlotT1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

225

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

FlashFlash Width (TIE)

Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal received from a TIE line that the PBX can recognise as a hookswitch flash signal.

Value Range
8 n (n=3191) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] SlotT1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller IDCaller ID End Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, AD

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] SlotT1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual

227

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Various settings can be programmed for each T1 channel. To change the status of ports, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

228

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

CO Dial Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a trunk.

PC Programming Manual

229

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
DTMF, Pulse

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Channel Type
Selects the channel type.

Value Range
Undefined: Not assigned GCOT: Ground Start Central Office LCOT: Loop Start Central Office DDI/DID: Direct Dialling In/Direct Inward Dialling TIE (E & M): TIE Line OPX: Off Premise Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.23.1 T1 Line Service

Trunk Property (for TIE channel)

Selects the trunk property of the TIE channel.

Value Range
Public: Use the DIL/DDI/DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls. Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

230

PC Programming Manual

1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the T1 channel.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms

PC Programming Manual

231

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the T1 channel.

Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Wink Signal Time Out

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink signal is not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.

None

Sending Caller ID to TIE

Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when the channel type is TIE.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Receiving Caller ID from TIE

Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when the channel type is TIE.

None

Dial Tone to Extension

Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone.

Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.

Value Range
None, 16 n (n=1255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

PC Programming Manual

235

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.20 [1-1] SlotT1 PortChannel Command (KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Commands for the T1 channels can be programmed.

INS
Puts the channel in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.20 [1-1] SlotT1 PortChannel Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the channel out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.20 [1-1] SlotT1 PortChannel Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

236

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.21 [1-1] SlotE1 Card Property

The properties of the E1 card can be specified. To adjust related settings, click Line Signal Setting, MFC-R2 Setting 1, and MFC-R2 Setting 2.

Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of E1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the E1 card.

2.7.21 [1-1] SlotE1 Card Property

PC Programming Manual

237

2.7 [1] Configuration

Answer Detection Timer

Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
32 n (n=1255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] SlotE1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Seizure ACK Wait Timer

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the seizure ACK signal.

Value Range
0.5 n (n=120) s

238

Selects the RAI signal detection mode.

Value Range
Type 1, Type 2

PC Programming Manual

Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.

Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand

240

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] SlotE1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse DialPulse Inter-digit Pause

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, AD

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] SlotE1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller IDCaller ID Information End Code

Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.

PC Programming Manual

243

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
*, #, AD

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] SlotE1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller IDCaller ID End Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, AD

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] SlotE1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

244

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.22 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyLine Signal Setting

DR2 Setting Type
Selects the control type of the DR2 (Digital System R2) signal.

Selects the position of the pulse dial control bit in a DR2 signal.

Value Range
A-bit, B-bit

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyLine Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual

245

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Bit Position for Clear Back

Selects the position of the clear-back signal control bit in a DR2 signal.

Selects the bit pattern for a forced release signal.

Value Range
A=0/B=0, A=0/B=1, A=1/B=0, A=1/B=1

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyLine Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

246

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

E&M Signalling Type

Selects the control bit of an E & M signal.

Value Range
Type-1:A bit=0, Type-2:A bit=1, Type-3:B bit=0, Type-4:B bit=1, Type-5:A bit=1,B bit=1

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyLine Signal Setting

247

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

E&M-P Pulse LengthAnswer

Specifies the length of an answer signal.

Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyLine Signal Setting

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Meter Pulse DetectionMode

Specifies the mode for call charge meter pulses.

Value Range
No Detection: Meter pulses are not sent or received. Outgoing call only: Sends a call charge meter pulse for outgoing trunk calls. Both calls: Sends and receives call charge meter pulses.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyLine Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Meter Pulse DetectionBit Position

Specifies the bit position of a call charge meter pulse.

Value Range
A-bit, B-bit, C-bit, D-bit

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyLine Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

DSP Gain AdjustmentDTMF Transmit

Specifies the output power of the DTMF signal sent from the DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

Value Range
-12 dB3 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyLine Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DSP Gain AdjustmentDTMF Receive

Specifies the strength range within which a DTMF signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as a DTMF signal.

Value Range
-42 - 0 dB -11- 0 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyLine Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

DSP Gain AdjustmentMFC-R2 Receive

Specifies the strength range within which an MFC-R2 signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as an MFC-R2 signal.

Value Range
-38 - 0 dB -23 - 0 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyLine Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Frame Error DetectionError Detection

Specifies whether the PBX detects frame synchronisation errors.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyLine Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Frame Error DetectionError Rate

Specifies the number of frame errors per second which the PBX needs to recognise a remote alarm. To enable this setting, Frame Error DetectionError Detection on this screen should be set to Yes.

Value Range
No limit, 16 n (n=17) errors/s

PC Programming Manual

251

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyLine Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

252

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.23 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC1

ANI ServiceMode
Selects the ANI (Automatic Number Identification) service mode.

Value Range
None: ANI service is not activated. Incoming call only: Receives the caller's number from the E1 line. Outgoing call only: Sends the caller's number to the E1 line. Both calls: Sends and receives the caller's number through the E1 line.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ANI ServiceANI Max. digits

Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received via ANI when receiving a call with ANI.

Value Range
None, 116

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

MFC-R2 TimerForward
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 forward signal sent from the telephone company.

Value Range
130 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC1

PC Programming Manual

253

2.7 [1] Configuration

Specifies the code used to recognise the end of each digit in an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 115

PC Programming Manual

Specifies the destination of incoming trunk calls for each Group-ll code respectively.

Value Range
Undefined, Subscriber, Operator, Collect Call

256

Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [#].

Value Range
1115

PC Programming Manual

257

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

258

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.24 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC2

Group-A Code AssignmentAddress Complete
Specifies the address complete (completion of dial reception) code sent to the telephone company.

Value Range
115

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC2

259

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Group-A Code AssignmentANI (N+1) Additional Code

Specifies the second code when two codes are needed to request the telephone company to send the (N+1)th digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 115

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC2

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Group-A Code Assignment(N) Request

Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N)th digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 115

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC2

261

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Group-A Code Assignment(N-3) Request

Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-3)th digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 115

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-B Code AssignmentIdle (1)

Specifies the code used normally to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle.

Value Range
Undefined, 115

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC2

Programming Manual References

Group-B Code AssignmentIdle (3)

Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle when the call is disconnected by the caller.

Value Range
Undefined, 115

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-B Code AssignmentBusy

Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is busy.

Value Range
Undefined, 115

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-B Code AssignmentUnallocated

Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the received number is not defined.

Value Range
Undefined, 115

PC Programming Manual

Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the call is not charged.

Value Range
Undefined, 115

264

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] SlotE1 Card PropertyMFC2

Programming Manual References

2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 Port

266

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Value Range
INS: The channel is in service. OUS: The channel is out of service. Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Channel Type
Selects the channel type.

PC Programming Manual

267

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
Undefined: Not assigned DR2: Digital System R2 E&M-P: Pulsed E & M E&M-C: Continuous E & M

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.22.1 E1 Line Service

Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the E & M channel.

Value Range
Public: Use the DIL/DDI/DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls. Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call FeaturesSUMMARY 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY 1.30.1 TIE Line Service

CO Dial Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a trunk. If MFC-R2 is selected, the PBX (not the telephone company) sends a dial tone to the caller when making a trunk call using an E1 line.

Value Range
DTMF, Pulse, MFC-R2

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

268

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection 1.22.1 E1 Line Service

E1 Receiver Type
Selects the type of signal the PBX receives from the E1 line. This should be set to MFC-R2 when receiving ANI (Automatic Number Identification) numbers from the E1 line.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Sending Caller ID to TIE

Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when Channel Type on this screen is set to E&M-P or E&M-C.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

271

2.7 [1] Configuration

Receiving Caller ID from TIE

Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when Channel Type on this screen is set to E&MP or E&M-C.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 Port

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Answer Wait Timer

Selects the length of time that the PBX waits for the called outside party to answer an outgoing trunk call. The line will be disconnected automatically when this timer expires.

2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 Port

PC Programming Manual

273

2.7 [1] Configuration

274

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.26 [1-1] SlotE1 PortChannel Command

Commands for the E1 channels can be programmed.

INS
Puts the channel in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.26 [1-1] SlotE1 PortChannel Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 Port

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the channel out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the channel, for example, for the purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.26 [1-1] SlotE1 PortChannel Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 Port

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

275

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.27 [1-1] SlotE&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only)

The properties for the E & M card can be specified.

Interface
Selects E & M signal type.

Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
32 n (n=1255) ms

276

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

None

Pulse DialPulse Type

279

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

FlashFlash Detection
Enables the PBX to detect hookswitch flash signals.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] SlotE&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

FlashMinimum BREAK Width

Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal.

Value Range
8 n (n=363) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] SlotE&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

Feature Guide References

None

Line Signal SettingE&M-P Pulse LengthClear

Selects the length of a clear pulse.

Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] SlotE&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual

281

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Line Signal SettingE&M-P Pulse LengthE&M-P Seizure ACK

Enables the PBX to wait for an E & M-P seizure ACK signal.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] SlotE&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller IDCaller ID Information End Code

Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, AD

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] SlotE&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller IDCaller ID End Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, AD

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] SlotE&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual

283

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Various settings can be programmed for each E & M channel. To change the status of channels, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

284

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Value Range
INS: The channel is in service. OUS: The channel is out of service. Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.29 [1-1] SlotE&M PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the channel.

Value Range
Public: Use the DIL method to distribute incoming trunk calls. Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call FeaturesSUMMARY 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY 1.30.1 TIE Line Service

PC Programming Manual

285

2.7 [1] Configuration

Dialling Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the E & M line.

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the E & M line.

Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

287

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

E&M TIE Line Type

Selects the type of the voice path for an E & M line.

Value Range
2 wires, 4 wires

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Send Ringback Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Dial Tone to Extension

Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.

Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual

289

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.

Value Range
None, 16 n (n=1255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

290

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.29 [1-1] SlotE&M PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Commands for the E & M channels can be programmed.

INS
Puts the channel in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.29 [1-1] SlotE&M PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the channel out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the channel, for example, for the purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.29 [1-1] SlotE&M PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

291

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.30 [1-1] SlotDID Card Property

The property for the DID card can be specified.

First Dial Timer

Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DID line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
32 n (n=1255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] SlotDID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DTMF ToneDTMF Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
64 + 16 n (n=011) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] SlotDID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse DialPulse % Break

Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
60 %, 67 %

292

None

Line Signal SettingWink Signal Width

Specifies the length of a wink signal.

294

PC Programming Manual

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.

PC Programming Manual

295

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
*, #, AD

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] SlotDID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

296

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.31 [1-1] SlotDID Port

Various settings can be programmed for each DID port. To change the status of ports, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

2.7.31 [1-1] SlotDID Port

PC Programming Manual

297

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Value Range
INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] SlotDID Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.32 [1-1] SlotDID PortPort Command

Feature Guide References

None

Dialling Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the DID line.

Value Range
DTMF, Pulse

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] SlotDID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the DID line.

298

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink signal is not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.

PC Programming Manual

None

PC Programming Manual

301

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

PC Programming Manual

303

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.32 [1-1] SlotDID PortPort Command

Commands for the DID ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the port in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.32 [1-1] SlotDID PortPort Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.31 [1-1] SlotDID Port

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.32 [1-1] SlotDID PortPort Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.31 [1-1] SlotDID Port

Feature Guide References

None

304

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.33 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Card Property

The properties of the VoIP Gateway card can be specified.

En-bloc Dialling setting

Selects the call dialling mode.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.33 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Card Property

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / ToneDialExtension Inter-digit 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 2ISDN en Bloc Dial[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

Feature Guide References

1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

QSIG-CT
Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.33 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)by QSIG

QSIG-CF
Enables a call to be forwarded to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network. When using the Centralised VM feature, set this to "No".

Value Range
Yes, No

PC Programming Manual

305

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.33 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)by QSIG

Maintenance Port Number (KX-TDA30 only)

Specifies the default maintenance port number of the IP network.

Value Range
1000065535

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.33 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

CTI Port Number (KX-TDA30 only)

Specifies the default CTI port number of the IP network.

Value Range
1000065535

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.33 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

306

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.34 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Port

Status of the IP-GW ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service). To change the status of ports, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

2.7.34 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Port

PC Programming Manual

307

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Value Range
INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.34 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.35 [1-1] SlotIP-GW PortPort Command

Feature Guide References

None

308

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.35 [1-1] SlotIP-GW PortPort Command

Commands for the IP-GW ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the port in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.35 [1-1] SlotIP-GW PortPort Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.34 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Port

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.35 [1-1] SlotIP-GW PortPort Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.34 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Port

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

309

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.36 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card Property

The properties of the VoIP Extension card can be specified. To adjust settings related to IP-PT network data transmission, click Common Settings.

IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the card.

Value Range
1.0.0.0223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Subnet Mask
Specifies the subnet mask of the card.

Value Range
0.0.0.0255.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Gateway Address [Common Settings]

Displays the default gateway address of the network for IP-PTs (reference only). To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings, and set the desired value for Gateway Address.

Value Range
1.0.0.0223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card Property

310

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

PC Programming Manual

311

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
-146 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-146 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-146 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

NLP Setting
Selects whether the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) is used to control echo sound quality.

312

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
Use Non-Linear Processor, Use Fixed TX Gain

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

PC Programming Manual

313

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.37 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card PropertyCommon Settings

IP network data transmission settings can be programmed. To activate any changes made to settings on this screen, it is necessary to set all installed IP-EXT cards to OUS, then back to INS.

Gateway Address
Specifies the default gateway address of the IP network.

Value Range
1.0.0.0223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.37 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card PropertyCommon Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.36 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card PropertyGateway Address [Common Settings]

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server)

Specifies the UDP port used by the IP-EXT card to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port. For voice communications, an IP-EXT16 card uses 64 and an IP-EXT4 card uses 16 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here.

Value Range
102465472

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.37 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card PropertyCommon Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT)

Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data on the IPPT side. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port. For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 64 (with the IP-EXT16 card) or 16 (with the IP-EXT4 card) contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here.

314

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
102465472

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.37 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card PropertyCommon Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

PC Programming Manual

315

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.38 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Port

Various settings can be programmed for each IP extension port. To change the status of extension ports, click Command.

IP-PT Registration and De-registration

An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used. Programming instructions of the PBX are given below. It is possible to de-register the IP-PT later.

Preparation
Follow the steps below to prepare before registering an IP-PT.

1. Open 2.7.36 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card Property, and confirm that the IP address and
subnet mask settings of the IP-EXT card are correct.

2. Open 2.7.37 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card PropertyCommon Settings and set the
gateway address.

Registration
Follow the steps below to register the IP-PT.

1. Connect the IP-PT to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply. 2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers are displayed on the left.

3. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
A screen will appear with information on the current IP-PT extension number and index number for programming.

4. Programme the relevant IP-PT. 5. Click Next.

If the registration is still in process, the dialogue box will show "Waiting for IP-PT to register...". Click OK. If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Succeed". If there are more IP-PTs to be registered, click Continue to resume or Cancel to terminate the registration. If not, click Close. Once the IP-PT is successfully registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "Registered".

De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-PT.

1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.

2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.

3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".

316

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

If the de-registration is unsuccessful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Error". De-registration will be terminated.

4. Click Close.
If the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".

Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-PT when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the IP-PT.

1. Click Forced De-registration.

A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.

2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click
Next. A dialogue box will appear.

3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.

4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".

5. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Port

PC Programming Manual

317

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port. To change the extension number of an extension, follow the steps below:

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:

318

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Headset OFF/ON
Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT.

2.7.38 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Port

320

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.40 [1-1] SlotSIP-GW Port (KX-TDA30 only)

Status of the SIP-GW ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service). To change the status of ports, click Command.

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

PC Programming Manual

323

2.7 [1] Configuration

Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

The properties of the Optional Base card can be specified. To change the status of slots on the OPB card, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual

325

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Feature Card Type

Indicates the type of option card that is installed or pre-installed in each sub-slot (reference only). Note that for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, only one ECHO16 card can be installed per OPB3 card.

Value Range
Card Type: MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card Maximum Quantity: MSG4: 4 with KX-TDA100, 4 with KX-TDA200, 16 with KX-TDA600 DPH4: 4 with KX-TDA100, 4 with KX-TDA200, 16 with KX-TDA600 DPH2: 8 with KX-TDA100, 8 with KX-TDA200, 32 with KX-TDA600 ECHO16: 2 with KX-TDA100, 2 with KX-TDA200 EIO4: 4 with KX-TDA100, 4 with KX-TDA200, 16 with KX-TDA600

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Installation Manual References

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1.3.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDA600: 1.3.1 Optional Equipment

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Status
Indicates the status of the option card in each slot (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the card command: Click the desired cell in the column. Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

326

327

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Device Type
Selects the type of connected output device (for output ports only).

Value Range
Relay, Ringer

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.10 External Relay Control

Input Signal Decision Time

Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX recognises the input and makes a sensor call.

Value Range
32 n (n=2255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor

Input Signal Detection Reopening Time

Specifies the length of time after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from the sensor will be ignored.

Value Range
10 n (n=1255) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

328

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor

PC Programming Manual

329

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.42 [1-1] SlotOPB Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only)

Commands for the service cards installed on the OPB card can be programmed.

INS
Puts the card in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.42 [1-1] SlotOPB Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the card out of service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.42 [1-1] SlotOPB Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pre-install
Assigns the card type to a certain sub-slot (Pre-installation).

Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card

330

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

PC Programming Manual

331

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.43 [1-1] SlotOPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Option cards can be installed to and removed from the OPB3 cards installed in the PBX. Click the right and left arrow buttons (">", "<") to add or remove option cards.

Option Card Type

Selects the type of option card to install to the OPB3 card.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.43 [1-1] SlotOPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Installation Manual References

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1.3.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDA600: 1.3.1 Optional Equipment

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot 2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

Slot 1Slot 3
Selects the slot on the OPB3 card to install or remove the option card for.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.43 [1-1] SlotOPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot 2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

332

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Card Inserted
Displays the type of option card currently installed to each slot of the OPB3 card.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.43 [1-1] SlotOPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot 2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

333

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.44 [1-1] SlotCTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

The properties of the CTI-LINK card can be specified. Note that the IP address information must be specified in accordance with the settings of the network that it will be used on.

IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the PBX.

Value Range
1.0.0.0223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.44 [1-1] SlotCTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Subnet Mask
Specifies the subnet mask of the PBX.

Value Range
0.0.0.0255.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.44 [1-1] SlotCTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Gateway
Specifies the gateway address.

Value Range
1.0.0.0223.255.255.255

334

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.44 [1-1] SlotCTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Maintenance Port Number

Specifies a port number used to operate KX-TDA Maintenance Console via LAN.

Value Range
1000065535

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.44 [1-1] SlotCTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

CTI Port Number

Specifies a port number used to operate CTI via LAN.

Value Range
1000065535

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.44 [1-1] SlotCTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

PC Programming Manual

335

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.45 [1-1] SlotDPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

The status of the DPH ports can be viewed, and set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service).

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.45 [1-1] SlotDPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Number
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.45 [1-1] SlotDPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Status
Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: Click the desired cell in the column. Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

336

Specifies the length of time after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from the sensor will be ignored.

PC Programming Manual

337

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
10 n (n=1255) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.45 [1-1] SlotDPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor

338

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.46 [1-1] SlotDPH Port Command (KX-TDA30 only)

Commands for the DPH ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the port in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.46 [1-1] SlotDPH Port Command (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-1] SlotDPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.46 [1-1] SlotDPH Port Command (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-1] SlotDPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

339

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable Station

Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. A maximum of 28 (with the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), 256 (with the KX-TDA600) or 512 (with the KX-TDA600 with EMEC card installed) PSs can be registered. Information on 32 PSs is displayed at a time. To display other PSs, click the applicable tab.

PS Registration and De-registration

A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used. Programming instructions of the PBX are given below; programming instructions of the PS are found in the Installation Manual. It is possible to de-register the PS later.

Registration
Follow the steps below to register the PS.

1. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers are displayed on the left.

2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
A screen will appear with information on the current PS extension number and index number for programming.

3. Register the relevant PS.

For details, refer to the Installation Manual. KX-TDA30: Registering DECT PS 2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX Registering 2.4 GHz PS 2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Registering DECT PS 2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX Registering 2.4 GHz PS 2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA600: Registering DECT PS 2.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX Registering 2.4 GHz PS 2.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX

4. Click Next.
If the PS registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show "Waiting for portable station to register...". Click OK. If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Succeed". If there are more PSs to be registered, click Continue to resume. If not, click Close. Once a PS is successfully registered, the status of the PS will update to show "Registered".

De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the PS.

1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.

2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.

3. Click Confirm.

340

PC Programming Manual

2.7 [1] Configuration

If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed". If the de-registration is unsuccessful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Error". De-registration will be terminated.

4. Click Close.
If the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".

Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the PS when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or de-registration has been performed only on the PS.

1. Click Forced De-registration.

A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.

2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click
Next. A dialogue box will appear.

3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.

4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".

5. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".

Personal Identification Number

Specifies the Personal Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS to the wrong PBX. Note that the same PIN should be entered at the PS, before the PS is registered to the PBX.

Value Range
4 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable Station

Installation Manual References

For KX-TDA30: 2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX 2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX 2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX For KX-TDA600: 2.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX 2.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX

PC Programming Manual

341

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable Station

Programming Manual References

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainExtension Name

Feature Guide References

1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Status
Indicates whether a certain PS is registered (reference only).

Value Range
None, Registered

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable Station

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

PC Programming Manual

343

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.48 [1-3] Option

System options can be programmed. It is possible to clear the master CS information (Master CS Port and Radio System ID) by following the procedure below in batch mode:

1. Click Clear Master CS. 2. Click Yes. To abort the procedure, click No.
If the system data is downloaded to the PBX after the master CS information has been cleared, it is necessary to register all PSs again in the interactive mode. Master CS information will be assigned automatically when a CS is connected to the PBX. Without the Radio System ID, PSs cannot be registered.

System WirelessSystem ID
Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS (reference only).

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.48 [1-3] Option

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

New Card InstallationCard Status for any Card

Selects the initial status of cards after installation.

2.7.49 [1-4] Clock Priority

Slot Number (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), Shelf-Slot Number (KXTDA600)
Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI, PRI, T1, and E1 cards (the PRI, T1, and E1 cards are available with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) that are used to forward a clock pulse from an external source to the PBX. Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the telephone company provides. To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below:

1. Assign a Clock Priority to each BRI, PRI, T1 and/or E1 card. 2. Set the status of the present clock source card to "OUS", then "INS".
Note If multiple PBXs are used to establish a private network (TIE line service, QSIG network, etc.) without being connected through the telephone company, assign only one PBX as the clock source on the network. That PBX should have a card connected to a telephone company line selected as its clock source. All other PBXs should have cards connected to the network selected as the clock source. This enables all PBXs on the network to synchronise their timing.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30: None, BRI1, BRI2, E1 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: None, BRI4, BRI8, PRI23, PRI30, T1, E1

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.49 [1-4] Clock Priority

Feature Guide References

None

346

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8
2.8.1

[2] System
[2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
The date and time of the PBX, and Summer time (daylight saving time) can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be programmed. To set the system date and time of the PBX, click 2.8.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight SavingDate & Time Setting.

Setting
Enables Summer time.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.5 Automatic Setup

Start DateYear, Month, Day

Specifies the start date of daylight savings time.

Value Range
Year: 20002099 Month: 112 Day: 131

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.5 Automatic Setup

PC Programming Manual

347

2.8 [2] System

End DateYear, Month, Day

Specifies the end date of daylight savings time.

Value Range
Year: 20002099 Month: 112 Day: 131

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.5 Automatic Setup

348

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8.2

[2-1] Date & Time/Daylight SavingDate & Time Setting

The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions (e.g., PT, PS).

Date & Time

Indicates the current date and time. Values can be entered by clicking the parameter you want to change and typing the new value, or by clicking the up/down arrows beside the date and time.

Value Range
Year: 20002099 Month: 0112 Day: 0131 Hour: 0023 Minute: 0059 Second: 0059

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight SavingDate & Time Setting

Programming Manual References

2.8.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

349

2.8 [2] System

2.8.3

[2-2] Operator & BGM

Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified.

PBX OperatorDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). To select an extension number, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.5 Operator Features

BGM and Music on HoldMusic Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only)

Selects the audio source of BGM2.

Value Range
External BGM Port 2, Internal BGM 1, Internal BGM 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.4 Music on Hold 1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

BGM and Music on HoldMusic Source of BGM (KX-TDA30 only)

Selects the audio source of BGM.

350

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Value Range
External BGM, Internal BGM 1, Internal BGM 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

351

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.12.1 Call Transfer

352

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8.4

[2-3] Timers & Counters

Various system timers and counters can be programmed.

Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone

Automatic RedialRepeat Counter
Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled.

Value Range
015

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

Automatic RedialRepeat Interval

Specifies the length of time between repeated Automatic Redial attempts.

Value Range
10 n (n=1360) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

Automatic RedialRedial Call Ring Duration

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer an Automatic Redial attempt. This is the length of time that the called party's extension will ring for each attempt.

Value Range
10 n (n=130) s

PC Programming Manual

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

DialAnalogue CO First Digit

Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the caller's voice over the analogue trunk.

Value Range
115 s

Maintenance Console Location

Value Range
1240 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

356

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsIntercept No Answer TimeIntercept No Answer TimeDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

RecallHold Recall
Specifies the length of time until the holding extension receives a Hold Recall ring or alarm tone when a held call remains unretrieved.

Value Range
0 (disable the Hold Recall)240 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.1 Call Hold

RecallTransfer Recall
Specifies the length of time that a transferred call waits to be answered, before being redirected to the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the original transferring extension.

Value Range
1240 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.12.1 Call Transfer

RecallCall Park Recall

Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved, before the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension that parked the call hears a Call Park Recall ring.

PC Programming Manual

357

2.8 [2] System

2.8 [2] System

Tone LengthReorder Tone for PT Handset

Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard when using a PT handset. The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires.

Value Range
115 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Tone LengthReorder Tone for PT Hands-free

Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard from the built-in speaker of a PT in handsfree mode. The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires. This setting is applied to PSs as well as PTs.

Value Range
115 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release 1.11.1 Hands-free Operation

DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf

DISADelayed Answer Timer
Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM.

Value Range
030 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

PC Programming Manual

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM 2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice MessageDISA Message 2.12.6 [6-6] TenantOperator (Extension Number)

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA2nd Dial Timer for AA

Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates.

Value Range
05 s

360

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice MessageDISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISAIntercept TimerDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the length of time until an unanswered DISA call is intercepted and redirected to the intercept routing destination after the original destination receives the call in each time mode.

Value Range
060 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 1Intercept DestinationWhen called party does not answerDay, Lunch, Break, Night 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 1Intercept DestinationWhen called party does not answerDay, Lunch, Break, Night 2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice MessageDISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISADisconnect Timer after Intercept

Specifies the length of time that an intercepted DISA call rings at the intercept routing destination before being disconnected.

Value Range
060 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice MessageDISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

PC Programming Manual

361

2.8 [2] System

DISACO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter

Specifies the number of times that the caller can prolong a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line. (Selecting "0" enables the caller to prolong the trunk-to-trunk call without restriction.)

Value Range
015

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)

DISAReorder Tone Duration

Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is sent to the caller before the call is disconnected.

Value Range
115 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice MessageDISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DoorphoneCall Ring Duration

Specifies the length of time that a call from a doorphone rings until the call is cancelled when there is no answer.

Value Range
10 n (n=115) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call

DoorphoneCall Duration
Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected.

Value Range
10 n (n=030) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

PC Programming Manual

363

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call

DoorphoneOpen Duration
Specifies the length of time that a door stays unlocked after being opened from an extension.

Value Range
27 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.14.1.2 Conference

Unattended ConferenceDisconnect Timer

Specifies the length of time until an Unattended Conference is disconnected after the parties involved in the conference receive a warning tone but the conference originator does not return to the conference.

Value Range
0240 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.14.1.2 Conference

Miscellaneous
Caller IDWaiting to receive
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analogue trunk. If the Caller ID is received through an analogue trunk card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through a port to which Caller ID Detection is disabled, this timer is not applicable.

Value Range
015 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial 2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

366

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Caller IDVisual Caller ID Display

Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from the telephone company, is shown on the display. The Caller ID number flashes on the display for five seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.

Value Range
0250 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting 1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone 1.18.1 Caller ID

Extension PINLock Counter

Specifies the number of successive incorrect PIN entries allowed before the extension PIN is locked. A locked extension PIN can not be used until reset from the extension assigned as manager. (Specifying "None" disables this counter.)

Value Range
None, 115

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.5 Walking COS 1.9.6 Verification Code Entry 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

External SensorRing Duration

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer before cancelling a sensor call.

Value Range
10 n (n=115) s

PC Programming Manual

Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to idle status.

368

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8 [2] System

During ConversationDTMF Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of time between DTMF signals when numbers are dialled in succession from a PT or PS during a conversation.

Value Range
64 + 16 n (n=015) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

SVMRecording Time (KX-TDA30 only)

Specifies the maximum length of a message recorded by the SVM feature.

Value Range
1600 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired ExtensionSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only) 2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable StationSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVMDial Tone Continuous Time (KX-TDA30 only)

Specifies the length of time that dial tone 3 is heard after all messages stored by the SVM feature for an extension are finished playing.

Value Range
160 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired ExtensionSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only) 2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable StationSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

BroadcastingRing Duration
Specifies the length of time that a broadcasting call will ring. The broadcasting call will be established with members who answer within this time. If no members answer the call before this timer expires, the call is cancelled.

Value Range
0120 s

PC Programming Manual

371

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesBroadcasting Operation 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsMiscellaneousBroadcasting Operation 2.9.24 [3-10] Broadcasting Group

Feature Guide References

1.16.1 Broadcasting

372

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8.5

[2-4] Week Table

A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the Time Service Switching Mode option. Time Table numbers correspond to tenant numbers (for example, Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1). Select the desired Time Table from the Time Table No. list. When in Automatic Switching mode, the time modes of the tenant are switched as programmed in the corresponding Time Table. Manual switching is possible only from an authorised extension (determined by COS). To adjust the currently displayed Time Table, click and drag the divisions between two time periods. To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Time Table, including adding or deleting time blocks, click Time Setting.

PC Programming Manual

373

2.8 [2] System

2.8.6

[2-4] Week TableTime Setting

The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Time Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods.

1. Day/Lunch/NightDay1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start Setting

Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.6 [2-4] Week TableTime Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.3 Tenant Service 2.2.4 Time Service

1. Day/Lunch/NightDay1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night StartHour, Minute

Specifies the start time for each time block. Times can only be set when 1. Day/Lunch/NightDay1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night StartSetting is set to Enable.

Value Range
00:0023:59

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.6 [2-4] Week TableTime Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.3 Tenant Service 2.2.4 Time Service

2. BreakBreak 13 StartSetting
Enables the setting of the start time for each break period.

374

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8 [2] System

2.2.4 Time Service

376

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8.7

[2-5] Holiday Table

A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list. The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.

Holiday TableSetting
Enables the setting of the holiday.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Holiday TableStart DateMonth

Specifies the month of the holiday start date.

Value Range
112

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Holiday TableStart DateDay

Specifies the day of the holiday start date.

Value Range
131

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table

PC Programming Manual

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

378

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8.8

[2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, numbers to access other PBXs in a network, and KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling numbers can be programmed here. For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature Guide.

Extension
The leading numbers and the number of additional digits of the extension numbers for a maximum of 64 different extension numbering schemes can be programmed.

Leading Number
Specifies the leading number of extension numbers and floating extension numbers.

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings 2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) GroupUnit Settings 2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup Settings 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings 2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice MessageDISA Message 2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Feature Guide References

None

No. of Additional Digits

Specifies the number of additional digits following the leading number.

Value Range
None: 0 digit X: 1 digit XX: 2 digits

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual

379

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

None

Features
Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a dial tone.

Operator Call
Specifies the feature number used to call the operator.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM 2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant

Feature Guide References

2.2.5 Operator Features

Idle Line Access (Local Access)

Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call by Idle Line Access (selects an idle trunk automatically).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.9.2 [3-1-2] Trunk GroupLocal Access Priority

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Trunk Group Access

Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using an idle trunk from a certain trunk group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

380

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

None

TIE Line Access

Specifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Redial
Specifies the feature number used to redial the last number dialled.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling

Specifies the feature number used to make a call using a System/Personal Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual

381

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.10.4 [4-1-3] Wired ExtensionSpeed Dial 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed DiallingPersonal/System

Personal Speed Dialling - Programming

Specifies the feature number used to programme Personal Speed Dialling numbers at an extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

Single CO Line Access

Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using a certain trunk.

PC Programming Manual

383

2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager

Feature Guide References

1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Group Paging Answer

Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging

Automatic Callback Busy Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to cancel Automatic Callback Busy.
PC Programming Manual 385

2.8 [2] System

1.13.1 Call Hold

PC Programming Manual

387

2.8 [2] System

Call Park / Call Park Retrieve

Specifies the feature number used to hold a call in a parking zone or retrieve a call held in a parking zone.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.2 Call Park

Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number

Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held trunk call from a different extension by specifying the held trunk number.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.1 Call Hold

Door Open
Specifies the feature number used to open a door.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

388

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.17.2 Door Open

External Relay Access

Specifies the feature number used to activate a relay.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

Feature Guide References

1.17.10 External Relay Control

External Feature Access

Specifies the feature number used to access the features of a host PBX or the telephone company.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

ISDN Hold
Specifies the feature number used to hold a call using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual

389

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)by ISDN

COLR Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel COLR, which suppresses the presentation of the called party's number to the caller.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortSupplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Supplementary Service COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) 1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)by QSIG

CLIR Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel CLIR, which suppresses the presentation of the caller's number to the called party.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

Feature Guide References

390

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension

Specifies the feature number used to send either the CLIP number of the trunk in use (subscriber's number) or the extension to the network.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortISDN COSubscriber Number 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)CO SettingSubscriber Number 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 1CLIP ID 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 1CLIP ID

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

MCID
Specifies the feature number used to ask the telephone company to trace a malicious call. This feature can be used during a call or while hearing a reorder tone after the caller hangs up.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the FWD of incoming ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company (instead of the PBX), or confirm the FWD setting. Extension users can set the FWD destination to the network on an MSN basis.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk calls.

392

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8 [2] System

Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk and intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)SUMMARY

Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk calls to an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)SUMMARY

Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

394

2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging

Walking Extension
Specifies the feature number used to use the same extension settings at a new extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Call Waiting notification from a trunk, doorphone, or a call via an incoming call distribution group.

396

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8 [2] System

Log-in / Log-out
Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.7 Hot Line

Absent Message Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the display of an Absent Message.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

399

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.28.4 Timed Reminder

Timed Reminder Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.4 Timed Reminder

Printing Message
Specifies the feature number used to select a Printing Message to be output on SMDR.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & ChargeMainSMDR for External Hotel Application 2Printing Message 18

Feature Guide References

1.26.2 Printing Message

Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to lock or unlock an extension to make certain trunk calls and change the forwarding destination, using the Extension Dial Lock feature.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

None

400

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

Dial Information (CTI)

Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

402

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Broadcasting Operation
Specifies the feature number used to make a broadcasting call.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneousBroadcastingRing Duration 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsMiscellaneousBroadcasting Operation 2.9.24 [3-10] Broadcasting Group

Feature Guide References

1.16.1 Broadcasting

Centralized BLF Monitor Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to cancel monitoring of an extension using an NDSS button.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Busy Out Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to cancel the Busy Out status of an analogue trunk.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual

403

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 4Busy OutBusy Out for Analogue CO

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

Simplified Voice Message Access (KX-TDA30 only)

Specifies the feature number used to access the SVM feature to record, listen to and delete messages.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired ExtensionSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only) 2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable StationSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Other PBX Extension

Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network. The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be entered in this table. A maximum of 16 leading numbers can be programmed.

Dial
Specifies the leading extension number of the other PBX.

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE TableLeading Number

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

404

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

KX-T7710 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

The settings of the MESSAGE button and One-touch buttons on the KX-T7710 can be programmed.

Dial
Indicates the DTMF tone dial required by the PBX to recognise it and dial the preprogrammed number for each button (reference only).

Value Range
B: For MESSAGE button A1: For One-touch button 1 A2: For One-touch button 2 A3: For One-touch button 3 A4: For One-touch button 4 A5: For One-touch button 5 A6: For One-touch button 6 A7: For One-touch button 7 A8: For One-touch button 8

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling

Message KeyPhone Number

Specifies the feature number or telephone number dialled when the MESSAGE button on the KXT7710 is pressed. By default, this is set to the feature number used to call back a caller who left a message waiting indication, Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back. This is available only when the position of the Mode switch lever on the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesMessage Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling

PC Programming Manual

405

2.8 [2] System

One-touch Dial 0108Phone Number

Specifies the number dialled when a one-touch button on the KX-T7710 is pressed. This is available only when the position of the Mode switch lever on the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling

406

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8.9

[2-6-2] Numbering PlanQuick Dial

Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of Calls via a Private IP Network to Public Trunks" in the Feature Guide). A maximum of 80 Quick Dialling numbers can be programmed. When an EMEC/MEC card is installed in the PBX, a maximum of 4000 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or 1000 (with the KXTDA30) Quick Dialling numbers can be programmed. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab. For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature Guide.

Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work (MPR Software File Version 3.2000 or later)
Specifies whether to check if the quick dial numbering plan is compatible (does not overlap) with the main numbering plan.

Value Range
Disable: Checks whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan. Enable: Does not check whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering PlanQuick Dial

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling 1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network 2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Dial
Specifies the Quick Dialling number.

Value Range
Basic Memory: Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #) MEC expansion memory: Max. 8 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering PlanQuick Dial

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual

407

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling 1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network 2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Phone Number
Specifies the number to be dialled when the corresponding Quick Dialling number is used.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering PlanQuick Dial

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling 1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network 2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

408

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature

Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number. For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature Guide.

BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override

Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an extension in DND mode.

Value Range
1 digit (09, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 2Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 2Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) 1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA

Executive Busy Override

Specifies the feature number used to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.

Value Range
1 digit (09, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsExtension FeatureExecutive Busy Override 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 3Executive Override Deny 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 3Executive Override Deny

PC Programming Manual

409

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.8.2 Executive Busy Override

Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice

Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension's preset call receiving method to ring tone or voice.

Value Range
1 digit (09, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.3 Intercom Call

Message Waiting Set

Specifies the feature number used to leave a Message Waiting notification.

Value Range
1 digit (09, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.19.1 Message Waiting

Call Monitor
Specifies the feature number used to listen to a busy extension's conversation.

Value Range
1 digit (09, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsExtension FeatureCall Monitor

410

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 3Executive Override Deny 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 3Executive Override Deny

Feature Guide References

1.8.3 Call Monitor

Automatic Callback Busy

Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line becomes idle.

Value Range
1 digit (09, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2

Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an extension in DND mode. This is the same setting as BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override on this screen, and can be used to provide two methods of activating the specified features. This can be useful, for example, if users prefer to use a separate feature number to activate DND Override.

Value Range
1 digit (09, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 2Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 2Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) 1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

PC Programming Manual

411

2.8 [2] System

1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA

412

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum of 64 COS levels can be programmed.

TRS
Restrictions to features related to making trunk calls can be programmed for each COS.

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

TRS LevelDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) level for making trunk calls in each time mode.

Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls 26: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7: Restricts all trunk calls

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG SettingsMainCOS 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup SettingsMainCOS 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.11.1 [5-1] DoorphoneCOS 2.13.1 [7-1] Denied Code 2.13.2 [7-2] Exception Code

PC Programming Manual

413

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

TRS Level on Extension Lock

Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial Lock feature.

Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls 26: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7: Restricts all trunk calls

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.13.1 [7-1] Denied Code 2.13.2 [7-2] Exception Code

Feature Guide References

1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock

TRS Level for System Speed Dialling

Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making a trunk call using System Speed Dialling numbers, which overrides the TRS/Barring set for the current time mode.

Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls 26: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7: Restricts all trunk calls

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial 2.13.5 [7-5] MiscellaneousTRS Override by System Speed Dialling

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed DiallingPersonal/System 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

414

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

CO & SMDR
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit

Enables the extension-to-trunk call duration feature. The maximum call duration can be set using Extension-CO Duration Time on 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG Settings.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 2Extension - CO Call LimitationFor Incoming Call 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG SettingsMainCOS 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS

Feature Guide References

1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Transfer to CO
Enables the transferring of calls to trunks.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

PC Programming Manual

415

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS

Feature Guide References

417

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Executive Busy Override

Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.

418

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS

Feature Guide References

1.8.4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA

Call Monitor
Enables listening to a busy extension's conversation.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS

Feature Guide References

1.8.3 Call Monitor

Call Pickup by DSS

Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

PC Programming Manual

419

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

Programming & Manager

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Executive Busy Override Deny

Enables preventing other extensions from interrupting calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Group Forward Set

Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Disable: An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group. Enable-All: An extension can set call forwarding for all groups. Enable-Group: An extension can only set call forwarding for the group to which the extension belongs.

420

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMember 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Programming Mode Level

Specifies the level of authorisation for performing PT programming.

Value Range
Disable: A PT user cannot perform any programming. PROG Only: A PT user can perform only personal programming. PROG and PROG **/*#: A PT user can perform both personal and system programming.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 PT Programming

Manager
Specifies the authorisation to use manager features.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS

Feature Guide References

2.2.6 Manager Features

PC Programming Manual

421

2.8 [2] System

Time Service Switch

Enables manual switching of time modes.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

PDN/SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick up or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate for extensions at each COS level.

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

SDN Key Mode

Selects what happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook.

Value Range
Enhanced DSS: The registered (owner) extension is called. Standard SDN: A dial tone is heard.

422

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Making call by COS of SDN Key's Owner

Selects whether an extension that uses an SDN button to make calls is given the COS of the SDN button's registered (owner) extension. This setting is only available when SDN Key Mode above is set to "Standard SDN".

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsPDN/SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)COS Name

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

SDN Key Assignment by PT Program

Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

PC Programming Manual

423

2.8 [2] System

Optional Device & Other Extension

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Door Unlock
Enables using the door opener feature.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS

Feature Guide References

1.17.2 Door Open

External Relay Access

Enables access to external relays.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

424

PC Programming Manual

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS

Feature Guide References

427

2.8 [2] System

2.8.12 [2-7-2] Class of ServiceExternal Call Block

Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list.

Outgoing Trunk Group 164 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 196 (KX-TDA600)

Specifies the available trunk groups.

Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.12 [2-7-2] Class of ServiceExternal Call Block

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings 2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

428

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8.13 [2-7-3] Class of ServiceInternal Call Block

ExtensionRing Tone Pattern Plan 18

Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone PatternsCall from Others

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainRing Pattern Table 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainRing Pattern Table

Feature Guide References

None

Timed ReminderRing Tone Pattern Plan 18

Specifies the ring tone pattern for Timed Reminder alarms.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone PatternsCall from Others

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainRing Pattern Table 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainRing Pattern Table

Feature Guide References

None

Call BackRing Tone Pattern Plan 18

Specifies the ring tone pattern for callback ringing by Automatic Callback Busy.

432

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8 [2] System

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Various system settings can be programmed.

Option 1
PT LCDDate Display
Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions.

434

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

PT Fwd / DNDFwd LED

Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated.

Value Range
On (Solid): Red on Flash: Slow red flashing

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND 2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.20.3 LED Indication

PT Fwd / DNDDND LED

Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the DND feature is activated.

Value Range
On (Solid): Red on Flash: Slow red flashing

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND 2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.20.3 LED Indication

PC Programming Manual

435

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.2 Off-hook Monitor

PT OperationPrivacy Release by SCO key

Selects the function of the S-CO button during a trunk call.

Value Range
Enable: Pressing the S-CO button activates the Privacy Release feature Disable: Pressing the S-CO button switches the information shown on the PT display.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.14.1.3 Privacy Release

PT OperationJOG Dial Speed

Selects the speed at which items scroll on the display when the Jog Dial is used.

Value Range
Normal, High Speed

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

437

2.8 [2] System

PT OperationPT Ring Off Setting

Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions. If disabled, users cannot prevent incoming calls from ringing.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.13.1 Call Hold

PT OperationHold Key Mode

Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without Announcement feature.

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

PC Programming Manual

439

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension ClearHot Line (Pickup Dial)

Specifies whether the Hot Line setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.

Value Range
Clear, Do not clear

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear

CODECSystem CODEC
Selects the CODEC type for DPTs and PSs.

Value Range
A-Law, -Law

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

ISDN en Bloc Dial[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode

Specifies whether to automatically send "#" as an end code when dialling to an ISDN line; if used as the end code, "#" will not be dialled out as part of a number even when the "#" key is pressed.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortISDN COISDN Outgoing Call Type 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)CO SettingISDN Outgoing Call Type

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY

RedialAutomatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)

Selects whether Automatic Redial to an ISDN line is performed when the called party does not answer within a preprogrammed time period.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersAutomatic RedialRedial Call Ring Duration

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

RedialAutomatic Redial for Analogue CO

Selects whether Automatic Redial to an analogue CO line is performed when the called party does not answer within a preprogrammed time period.

PC Programming Manual

441

2.8 [2] System

2.8 [2] System

Extension - CO Call LimitationFor Incoming Call

Selects whether the time limit for extension-to-trunk calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing and incoming calls. COS determines the use of this feature, and the length of the time limit can be assigned on a trunk group basis.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsCO & SMDRExtension-CO Line Call Duration Limit 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG SettingsMainExtension-CO Duration Time

Feature Guide References

1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Automatic Time Adjustmentby ISDN & Caller ID (FSK)

Enables the PBX to adjust its clock every day according to the time information that the network provides with the first call after 3:05 AM.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.5 Automatic Setup

Option 3
Confirmation ToneTone 1 : Doorphone / Called by Voice
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 1. Confirmation Tone 1 is heard from a doorphone when the doorphone button is pressed, or from a PT when it receives a call in voice-calling mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

PC Programming Manual

None

Feature Guide References

1.29.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation ToneTone 3-2 : Start Talking after answering call

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-2. Confirmation Tone 3-2 is heard from an extension when answering a call by, for example, the Call Pickup feature.

444

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

1.29.1 Dial Tone

446

Feature Guide References

None

Option 4
DSS KeyDSS Key mode for Incoming Call
Enables the use of a DSS button to pick up an incoming call to another extension or an ICD group.

Value Range
ON or Flash, OFF

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

448

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 1.20.3 LED Indication

DSS KeyCall Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call

Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified extension. To enable this setting, DSS KeyDSS Key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to ON or Flash.

Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call. Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

DSS KeyCall Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call

Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified incoming call distribution group. To enable this setting, DSS KeyDSS Key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to ON or Flash.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

PC Programming Manual

449

2.8 [2] System

DSS KeyAutomatic Transfer for Extension Call

Specifies whether pressing a DSS or SDN button during an extension-to-extension call disconnects the current call or places the call on consultation hold.

Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the current call, and calls the extension assigned to the DSS or SDN button. Enable: The PBX places the current call on consultation hold.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.12.1 Call Transfer

TransferTransfer to Busy Extension without BSS Operation

Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy.

Value Range
Disable: The call is not transferred. (If the transfer destination has enabled the call waiting notification feature, it is possible to inform the destination about the call transfer.) Enable: The transferred call is queued for the time period specified in RecallTransfer Recall in 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersRecallTransfer Recall

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature 1.12.1 Call Transfer

TransferAutomatic Answer for Transferred Call

Enables transferred calls (including direct extension calls) to be automatically answered, when using the Hands-free Answerback feature.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

450

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 1.30.6 Network ICD Group

PC Programming Manual

451

2.8 [2] System

Private NetworkPublic Call through Private NetworkMinimum Public Caller ID Digits

Specifies the minimum length of Caller ID required for a call from a private network to be considered as a call from a public network.

Value Range
015

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Private NetworkTIE Call by Extension Numbering (Optional SD Card Required)

Enables extensions at PBXs connected in a network to have the same extension numbering scheme and make TIE line calls to each other. For example, extension 101 is registered at PBX 1, and extension 102 is registered at PBX 2. The user of extension 1 dials 102 and the dialled number is not found at the local PBX, so the call is redirected to the specified TIE Line and connected to extension 102. If disabled, different leading numbers need to be assigned for extensions at each PBX.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE TableLeading Number

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

System WirelessOut of Range Registration

Selects whether the PBX can set the status of a PS to Out of Range if no signal is received from the PS for a preset length of time. This feature must be enabled to allow PS roaming.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

452

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersSystem WirelessPS Out of Range Timer

Feature Guide References

1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

System WirelessSDN Delayed Ringing with LCD (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only)

Selects whether call information (such as Caller ID) is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS (i.e., a PS with one or more PDN buttons) when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonParameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Option 5
SLTSLT Hold Mode
Selects how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT. For details of each mode, see "1.13.1 Call Hold" in the Feature Guide.

Value Range
Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.1 Call Hold

PC Programming Manual

453

2.8 [2] System

SLTMessage Waiting Lamp Pattern (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp light pattern of SLTs.

Value Range
112

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Busy OutBusy Out for Analogue CO

Enables the PBX to automatically set a trunk to Busy Out status when a loop current is not detected, preventing that trunk from being used.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

ISDN Voice Path ConnectionConnect when "Alert" is sent from ISDN

Enables the voice path of an ISDN line to connect even when an "Alert" signal is received from the telephone company.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PT Feature AccessNo. 18
Specifies the System Feature Access Menu (18) shown on the display of an extension.

Value Range
None, Call Back Cancel, Call Pickup Direct, Call Pickup Group, Doorphone Call, Door Open, Relay ON, External BGM, Paging

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

PC Programming Manual

455

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN OptionFwd from ISDN to ISDN

Specifies whether alert messages are sent to the ISDN network. This setting should be enabled for networks that disconnect a call if an alert message is not received.

Value Range
Mode1: Disable Mode2: Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Option 6 (CTI)
1st Party CTISystem status retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for First Party Call Control CTI.

Value Range
060 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

1st Party CTISystem status retry counter

Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.

456

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8 [2] System

3rd Party CTISystem status retry interval timer

Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for Third Party Call Control CTI.

Value Range
060 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

3rd Party CTICDR retry counter

Specifies the number of times that the alive check of CDR is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times, the association is released automatically.

Value Range
010

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

CTI Multi PBX ControlPBX Name

Specifies the name of the PBX, for network programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

CTI Make CallSLT Ring

Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call is made from CTI, instead of the SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

460

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed.

Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA30 only)

Specifies a group of 4 SLT ports that can transfer Caller ID information to connected SLTs. When the port to which an extension is connected has this feature activated, there will be a short delay before the extension rings for incoming calls.

Value Range
Disable: No port Slot 01:DHLC4: Initially installed 4 Super Hybrid ports Slot nn:SLC4: Ports 1 to 4 of the SLC4 card (nn=slot number) Slot nn:SLC8 1-4: Ports 1 to 4 of the SLC8 card (nn=slot number) Slot nn:SLC8 5-8: Ports 5 to 8 of the SLC8 card (nn=slot number)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 7Extension Caller ID Sending

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Extension Caller ID Modulation Type

Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Channel Seizure Signal bits

Specifies the number of seizure bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
10 n (n=340) bits

PC Programming Manual

Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT (reference only).

462

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8 [2] System

Send Caller ID Name to Extension

Enables the PBX to send the caller's name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Send Caller ID Long Distance to Extension

Enables the PBX to send a call qualifier (Long Distance) (if received from the trunk) when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

464

PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

1.13.4 Music on Hold 1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

MOHMOH 2 (Music On Hold 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 2.

Value Range
-1111 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio GainPaging/MOH
466 PC Programming Manual

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

1.13.4 Music on Hold 1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

MOHMOH (Music On Hold) (KX-TDA30 only)

Specifies the music volume for the External BGM.

Value Range
-1111 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio GainPaging/MOH

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

1.13.4 Music on Hold 1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

PC Programming Manual

467

2.8 [2] System

2.8.20 [2-11-2] Audio GainCard

Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card.

Up Gain (To PBX)

Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX.

Value Range
-1515 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.20 [2-11-2] Audio GainCard

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Down Gain (From PBX)

Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card.

Value Range
-1515 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.20 [2-11-2] Audio GainCard

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

468

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

2.9
2.9.1

[3] Group
[3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG Settings
Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of each trunk group determine the settings of the trunks within that group. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) trunk groups can be programmed. For more information on trunk groups, see "2.2.2 Group" in the Feature Guide.

Main
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

None

COS
Specifies the COS of the trunk group, applied when making a call from a trunk to another trunk with TIE Line Service. If you wish to prevent such calls from being made, ensure that the COS specified here has a TRS level of "7" assigned for all relevant time modes in 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings.

Value Range
164

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings 2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

PC Programming Manual

469

2.9 [3] Group

Line Hunting Order

Specifies the trunk hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start from the lowest or highest numbered trunks, or to rotate uniformly among all trunks.

Value Range
High -> Low, Low -> High, Rotation

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG Settings

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

Feature Guide References

1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Caller-ID Modification Table

Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number).

Value Range
14

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification 2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Dialling Plan Table

Specifies the table to be used for en-bloc dialling.

Value Range
14

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

Feature Guide References

None

Tone Detection
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG Settings

PC Programming Manual

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA System 2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA Tone DetectionCyclic

Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

472

Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual 473

2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Host PBX Access Code

Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

None

Host PBX Access Code 110

Specifies the feature number used to access a trunk from the host PBX.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)

474

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

Collect Call Reject (For Brazil)

Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG Settings

475

2.9 [3] Group

Feature Guide References

None

Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)Flashing Time

Selects the length of the flash signal that the PBX sends to reject a collect call. This setting is only for users in Brazil.

Value Range
1000 ms, 1500 ms, 2000 ms, 2500 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

476

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.2

[3-1-2] Trunk GroupLocal Access Priority

Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a trunk call by Idle Line Access, the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle trunk according to the priority assigned here.

Trunk Group No. & Name

Specifies the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level. Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Trunk Group No. 164 For KX-TDA600: Trunk Group No. 196

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.2 [3-1-2] Trunk GroupLocal Access Priority

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

PC Programming Manual

477

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.3

[3-1-3] Trunk GroupCharge Rate

The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk group.

Trunk Group Name

Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.3 [3-1-3] Trunk GroupCharge Rate

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Rate
Specifies the call charge rate. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge OptionsDigits After Decimal Point in 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
09999999

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.3 [3-1-3] Trunk GroupCharge Rate

Programming Manual References

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services

478

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.4

[3-2] User Group

Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and several paging groups. A maximum of 8 tenants can be programmed.

User Group Name

Specifies the name of the extension user group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.4 [3-2] User Group

Programming Manual References

2.9.5 [3-3] Call Pickup Group 2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainUser Group 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainUser Group

Feature Guide References

2.2.2 Group

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs.

Value Range
18

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.4 [3-2] User Group

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2 Group 2.2.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual

479

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.5

[3-3] Call Pickup Group

Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/ KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) call pickup groups can be programmed. To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.

User Group Name

Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.5 [3-3] Call Pickup Group

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 2.2.2 Group

Pickup Group1st8th
Selects the call pickup groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 call pickup groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to more than 8 call pickup groups, click All Setting.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: None, 0164 For KX-TDA600: None, 0196

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.5 [3-3] Call Pickup Group

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 2.2.2 Group

480

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.6

[3-3] Call Pickup GroupAll Setting

Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups.

Call Pickup Group Name

Specifies the name of the call pickup group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.6 [3-3] Call Pickup GroupAll Setting

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 2.2.2 Group

User Group 132 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 196 (KX-TDA600)

Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group.

Value Range
ON (blue), OFF

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.6 [3-3] Call Pickup GroupAll Setting

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 2.2.2 Group

PC Programming Manual

481

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.7

[3-4] Paging Group

Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. A maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) paging groups can be programmed. To assign external pagers to paging groups, click External Pager. To assign extension user groups to paging groups easily, click All Setting.

User Group Name

Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group

Paging Group1st8th
Selects the paging groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 paging groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to more than 8 paging groups, click All Setting.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: None, 0132 For KX-TDA600: None, 0196

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging
482 PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

2.2.2 Group

PC Programming Manual

483

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.8

[3-4] Paging GroupAll Setting

Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.

Paging Group Name

Specifies the name of the paging group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.8 [3-4] Paging GroupAll Setting

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group

User Group 132 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 196 (KX-TDA600)

Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group.

Value Range
ON, OFF

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.8 [3-4] Paging GroupAll Setting

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group

484

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.9

[3-4] Paging GroupExternal Pager

External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.

Paging Group Name

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128 incoming call distribution groups can be programmed. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 2.4.7 ToolExtension List View). To assign extensions to ICD groups and change extension settings, click Member List. For more information on ICD Groups, see "1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY" in the Feature Guide.

Main
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Note that groups that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers of 24 digits.

Distribution Method
Selects the method for distributing calls to idle extensions of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Ring, UCD, Priority Hunting

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Call Waiting Distribution

Selects the call waiting distribution method for busy extensions of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
All, Distribution

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

FWD Mode
Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
No Ring, Ring

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND 2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND

488

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

DND Mode
Specifies whether extensions in DND mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
No Ring, Ring

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND 2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time Table and the audio source for the group. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.)

Value Range
18

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM 2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table 2.12.6 [6-6] TenantMusic On Hold

Feature Guide References

1.13.4 Music on Hold 2.2.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group. Depending on the COS, calls from certain extensions are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature. Also, when calls are forwarded or overflowed to a trunk, the TRS/Barring assigned for the COS of the incoming call distribution group applies.

PC Programming Manual

489

2.9 [3] Group

Value Range
164

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

Feature Guide References

None

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

491

2.9 [3] Group

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Overflow No Answer
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Note that groups that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers of 24 digits.

Specifies the overflow destination of queued calls when they are not answered or are redirected by Manual Queue Redirection in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

492

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature 1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature

Time out & Manual Queue RedirectionOverflow Time

Specifies the length of time calls wait in a queue before they are redirected to the overflow destination.

Value Range
None, 10 n (n=1125) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature 1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature

Hurry-up Level
Specifies the number of calls to hold in the queue before prompting Manual Queue Redirection by flashing the Hurry-up button.

Value Range
None, 130

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

PC Programming Manual

493

2.9 [3] Group

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: None, Table 1Table 64 For KX-TDA600: None, Table 1Table 128

494

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing

Enables the PBX to play messages/BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table, when the call arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued.

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Group Log / Group FWD

To set extension numbers easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.

498

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

Note that groups that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers of 24 digits.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Value Range
0100

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Incoming Call Log

PC Programming Manual

499

2.9 [3] Group

Group FWD Call from COSetting

Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls directed to the incoming call distribution group (reference only).

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings

Selects whether ICD Group buttons at extensions operate as normal or in Enhanced Phantom button mode. When set to Enhanced Phantom mode, creating an ICD Group button at an extension using PT personal programming automatically registers the extension as a member of the relevant ICD Group. The extension user can also specify the delayed ringing settings.

Value Range
Group DN, Enhanced Phantom

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMiscellaneous

Programming Manual References

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMemberDelayed Ring

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group FeaturesSUMMARY

OptionsLongest Idle Distribution (Optional SD Card Required)

Selects whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the extension that has been idle the longest (ACD).

Value Range
Disable (UCD), Enable (ACD)

PC Programming Manual

503

2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMiscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

OptionsWrap-up Timer based on

Selects whether the ICD Group member wrap-up timer or extension wrap-up timer is used. If Extension is selected here, Wrap-up Timer on 2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMember becomes unavailable. If ICD Group Member is selected, Wrap-up Timer on 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings and 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station Extension Settings become unavailable.

Value Range
Extension: The timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension, including a retrieved call on hold. ICD Group Member: The timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group.

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMiscellaneous

Programming Manual References

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMemberWrap-up Timer 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 7Wrap-up Timer 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 6Wrap-up Timer

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

504

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMember

Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200) or 128 (with the KX-TDA600) members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of multiple incoming call distribution groups. An ICD Group can also contain cellular phones, and network ICD groups (ICD groups at other PBXs in a network) using virtual PS (see "1.25.6 Virtual PS" in the Feature Guide). The forward destination assigned to a virtual PS (e.g., a cellular phone) can act as a member of an ICD group. Select the desired ICD group (1128) from the ICD Group No. list. To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension Number Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). To copy the members to another group, click Member List Copy, select the group, and click OK. Note This screen is only displayed by default when accessing the Maintenance Console in Administrator level.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of each member. In addition to the extension numbers of PT, SLT, PS, and T1-OPX extensions, floating extension numbers of PS Ring groups can also be specified.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMember

Programming Manual References

2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group FeaturesSUMMARY

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMember

Programming Manual References

2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group

PC Programming Manual

505

2.9 [3] Group

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group FeaturesSUMMARY

Delayed Ring
Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.)

Value Range
Immediate, 16 Rings, No Ring

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMember

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before the member extension can accept another call. This timer is used when "OptionsWrap-up Timer based on" is set to "ICD Group Member" in 2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMiscellaneous.

Value Range
10 n (n=0300) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMember

Programming Manual References

2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMiscellaneousOptionsWrap-up Timer based on 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 7Wrap-up Timer 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 6Wrap-up Timer

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

506

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.14 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group

If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a preprogrammed hunting type. If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which can be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 128 (with the KX-TDA600) hunting groups can be programmed, each containing up to 16 extensions. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To assign extensions as overflow destinations easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

Hunting Group Name

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.15 [3-6] Extension Hunting GroupMember List

Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the Hunting Group No. list. To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension Number Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). To copy numbers to another group, click Member List Copy, select the group, and click OK.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the hunting group member.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.15 [3-6] Extension Hunting GroupMember List

Programming Manual References

2.9.14 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group

Feature Guide References

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified in Extension Number above (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.15 [3-6] Extension Hunting GroupMember List

Programming Manual References

2.9.14 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group

Feature Guide References

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

PC Programming Manual

509

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) GroupSystem Settings

A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of the PBX. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group. With the KX-TDA30, a maximum of 1 VM (DPT) Group can be programmed; with the KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200, 2 VM (DPT) Groups can be programmed; and with the KX-TDA600, 8 VM (DPT) groups can be programmed.

Call Waiting on VM Group

Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DPT) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is not sent to any VM port.)

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) GroupSystem Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature 1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Intercept to Mailbox
Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VPS when a call is redirected to the VM (DPT) group by Intercept Routing. When the VPS receives the mailbox number, the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) GroupSystem Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 1Intercept DestinationWhen called party does not answerDay, Lunch, Break, Night 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 1Intercept DestinationWhen called party does not answerDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

510

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

Transfer Recall to Mailbox

Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS in these situations: (1) when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without Announcement feature using the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS, and the call is not answered within a programmed time period; (2) when the VPS is assigned as the Transfer Recall destination of a certain extension. When the VPS receives the mailbox number, the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) GroupSystem Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

PC Programming Manual

511

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) GroupUnit Settings

A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.

Floating Extension No.

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) GroupUnit Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Group Name
Specifies the name of the VM (DPT) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM (DPT) group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) GroupUnit Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

512

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.18 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) GroupUnit SettingsMember List

Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) in DPT Type Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) of 2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port will be displayed. In addition, the other information displayed here can also be set in 2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port.

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

514

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

Programming Manual References

DPT TypeType (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) 2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) GroupUnit Settings 2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup Settings

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.18 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) GroupUnit SettingsMember List

Programming Manual References

DPT TypeType (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) 2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) GroupUnit Settings

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

PC Programming Manual

515

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings

A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. A maximum of 2 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 8 (with the KX-TDA600) VM (DTMF) Groups can be programmed. For more information on Voice Mail groups and DTMF integration, see "1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group" and "1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration" in the Feature Guide.

VM DTMF Status SignalRingback Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is ringing.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF Status SignalBusy Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is busy.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF Status SignalReorder Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the dialled number is invalid.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, and P [pause])

516

None

VM DTMF Status SignalDisconnect

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the caller hangs up.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF Status SignalFWD to VM Ringback Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and the PBX is calling another port of the VPS.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

518

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

VM DTMF Status SignalFWD to VM Busy Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings

519

2.9 [3] Group

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF CommandListening Message

Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when an extension user answers a message waiting notification from the VPS, so that the extension user can retrieve a new message in a certain mailbox without having to dial the mailbox number manually.

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings

520

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

TimingDTMF Length for VM

Specifies the length of DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS.

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the Follow on ID to the VPS after the VPS has answered a call.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings

PC Programming Manual

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

OthersFWD to the VPS Sequence

Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is forwarded to the VPS, so that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also possible to send no DTMF signal to the VPS.

Value Range
None, Answer by Mailbox, AA

522

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

OthersIntercept Routing to the VPS Sequence

Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is intercepted to the VPS, so that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also possible to send no DTMF signal to the VPS.

Value Range
None, Answer by Mailbox, AA

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

OthersMailbox for Extension

Specifies whether the mailboxes use the same numbers as the extensions and incoming call distribution groups, or use different numbers as programmed for each extension or incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Extension Number, Programmed Mailbox Number

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings

Programming Manual References

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup SettingsMiscellaneousProgrammed Mailbox No. 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 1Programmed Mailbox No. 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 1Programmed Mailbox No.

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

523

2.9 [3] Group

OthersMessage Waiting Lamp Control

Specifies whether the PBX or VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the MESSAGE button light) when an extension user answers the message waiting notification from the VPS.

Value Range
By PBX, By VM

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

524

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup Settings

A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.

Floating Ext. No.

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF) group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Group Name
Specifies the name of the VM (DTMF) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM (DTMF) group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Type
Specifies the initial service mode in which the VPS answers calls.

Value Range
AA, VM

PC Programming Manual

525

2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

526

PC Programming Manual

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.21 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup SettingsMember List

Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list. To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension Number Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member List Copy, select the group, and click OK.

Extension Number of the SLT Port Connected to VM

Specifies the extension number assigned to the SLT port that is connected to the VPS.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.21 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup SettingsMember List

Programming Manual References

2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup Settings

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.21 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup SettingsMember List

Programming Manual References

2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup Settings

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

PC Programming Manual

527

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group

A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 28 (with the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KXTDA100/KX-TDA200) or 512 (with the KX-TDA600) PS extensions. To add PSs to the PS Ring Group, click Member List.

Floating Extension Number

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.23 [3-9] PS Ring GroupMember List

Each PS Ring Group can have up to 28 (with the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 512 (with the KX-TDA600) PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the PS Ring Group Number list. To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension Number Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member List Copy, select the group, and click OK.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the PS assigned to the PS Ring Group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.23 [3-9] PS Ring GroupMember List

Programming Manual References

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.25 [3-10] Broadcasting GroupMember List

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.16.1 Broadcasting

532

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings
For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned. To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate. To assign names and tenants to extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See 2.9.4 [3-2] User Group for more details.

Main
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

PC Programming Manual

533

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] SlotExtension PortPort Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

534

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Indicates the extension port type (reference only).

Value Range
DPT: DPT port (DLC) SLT: SLT port (SLC/MSLC/ESLC/EMSLC/CSLC) S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC) S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC) S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC) DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC) ISDN: ISDN port (BRI) IP-EXT: IP-Extension port (IP-EXT) For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only: ISDN: ISDN port (PRI) OPX: T1-OPX port (T1)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration

Telephone Type
Indicates the type of telephone connected to the extension port (reference only).

Value Range
DPT (15V)/DPT (40V): DPT is connected. APT (15V): APT is connected. DSS: DSS Console is connected. VM: VPS is connected. SLT: SLT is connected (or no telephone is connected to the Super Hybrid or SLT port). ISDN-Ext: ISDN telephone is connected. No Connection: No telephone is connected. CS: CS is connected. IP-EXT: IP-PT is connected.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual

535

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

User Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the extension belongs. Extension user groups are used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 132 For KX-TDA600: 196

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.2 Group 2.2.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the COS of the extension.

Value Range
164

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 09)

536

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

WARNING
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX. The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: a) Keeping PINs secret. b) Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed. c) Changing PINs frequently.

Intercept Destination
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

PC Programming Manual

537

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Intercept DestinationWhen called party does not answerDay, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept RoutingNo Answer and Intercept RoutingDND. Note that Intercept RoutingBusy calls are routed using Intercept DestinationWhen Called Party is Busy below.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsIntercept DestinationIntercept Destination When Called Party is Busy

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept DestinationWhen Called Party is Busy

Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual

539

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept No Answer Time

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

540

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:

Intercept No Answer TimeDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode. When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

542

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 1CLIP ID

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party's telephone when making a public network trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the extension on the caller's telephone display when answering a call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Option 1
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

PC Programming Manual

545

2.10 [4] Extension

546

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect. Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers of 24 digits.

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

PC Programming Manual

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Transfer Recall Destination

Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

548

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.12.1 Call Transfer

ARS Itemised Code

Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made from the extension for accounting and billing purposes.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

Feature Guide References

1.9.6 Verification Code Entry 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Option 2
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
PC Programming Manual 549

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] SlotExtension PortPort Command

550

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call

Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.

Value Range
Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker W-OHCA: Voice from the handset

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting 1.8.4.1 Second Call Notification to Busy ExtensionSUMMARY

Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a trunk, doorphone calls, and calls via an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Off, On

PC Programming Manual

551

2.10 [4] Extension

None

PC Programming Manual

553

2.10 [4] Extension

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

554

None

Feature Guide References

1.8.2 Executive Busy Override

Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for each extension.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

PC Programming Manual

555

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Absent Message

Charge Limit
Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the extension. When this limit is reached, the extension cannot be used to make further trunk calls. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge OptionsDigits After Decimal Point in 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
09999999

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

1.9.2 Budget Management

Intercom Call by Voice

Selects the method of receiving intercom calls. When Deny Voice Call is selected, the extension will always ring when receiving calls, regardless of how the caller wants to make the call.

Value Range
Tone Call, Voice Call, Deny Voice Call

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.3 Intercom Call

556

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] SlotExtension PortPort Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Outgoing Preferred Line

Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.

558

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
For KX-TDA30: No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups. ICM: An extension line is seized. F-1F-36: A trunk programmed for a flexible CO button (F-1F-36) is seized. A flexible CO button customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected. For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups. ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected. F-1F-36: A trunk programmed for a flexible CO button (F-1F-36) is seized. A flexible CO button customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.2 Line PreferenceOutgoing

Incoming Preferred Line

Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook. Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will be answered when going off-hook.

Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call. Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected. PDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only): The call arriving at any PDN button is selected. F-1F-36: The call arriving at a flexible CO button (F-1F-36) is selected. A flexible CO button customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.2 Line PreferenceIncoming

Call Waiting Tone Type

Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.

PC Programming Manual

559

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] SlotExtension PortPort Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Display Language
Selects the display language of the extension telephone.

562

PC Programming Manual

Specifies whether key pad tones are heard when dialling.

PC Programming Manual

563

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Automatic Answer for CO Call

Enables the extension to answer an incoming trunk call automatically after a certain number of rings without going off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback has been set on the extension. This setting is only effective when Forced Automatic Answer on this screen has been set to Off.

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

PC Programming Manual

565

2.10 [4] Extension

Forced Automatic Answer

Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls (both intercom and trunk calls) without going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-free Answerback setting.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flexible Button Programming Mode

Specifies whether the extension user can modify all flexible CO buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch Dialling buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when customising a One-touch Dialling button.

Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial

566

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
Unlock, Lock

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Incoming Call Log

PC Programming Manual

567

2.10 [4] Extension

Display Lock / SVM Lock (KX-TDA30 only)

Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log and Simplified Voice Message Log display (i.e., specifies whether other extension users can see the Incoming Call Log and SVM Log information at the extension).

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

568

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:

PC Programming Manual

569

2.10 [4] Extension

Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers of 24 digits.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

570

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Flash Mode during CO Conversation

Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation.

Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

571

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the extension's telephone type as follows: PT: Speech SLT: Audio

Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY

Option 8
Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

572

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10 [4] Extension

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

None

576

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

PC Programming Manual

577

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PDN Delayed Ringing (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] SlotExtension PortPort Command

PC Programming Manual

579

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

FWD Mode for Call from CO

Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

581

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

DND Set for Call from Extension

Indicates the current DND status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD No Answer Time

Indicates the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded (reference only).

Value Range
0120 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual

583

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.2 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsCLIP Generate

CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.

Location EntryBeginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)

Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
Wired extension number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.2 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsCLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Location EntryNumber to Generate

Specifies the number of locations to be programmed. A CLIP number will only be assigned to connected wired extensions, even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of wired extensions.

Value Range
1total number of connected wired extensions

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.2 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsCLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

ParameterDeleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the CLIP number.

Value Range
05

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

PC Programming Manual

585

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND

For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.

Call from COPresent Button Status

Specifies the status of the FWD/DNDExternal button.

Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)SUMMARY

Call from COFWD Status Availability

Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have been programmed. ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call from CODND Status Availability

Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button. ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.

586

Specifies the status of the FWD/DNDInternal button.

Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND

PC Programming Manual

587

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)SUMMARY

Call from ExtensionFWD Status Availability

Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call from ExtensionDND Status Availability

Enables or disables the DND feature for intercom calls.

Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button. ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Call from ExtensionFWD Mode

Specifies the circumstances when incoming intercom calls are forwarded.

588

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.4 [4-1-3] Wired ExtensionSpeed Dial

Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling numbers (0099). A maximum of 10 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for each extension, or 100 when an MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is installed. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. If an MEC/EMEC card is installed, the available speed dialling numbers are shown in sets of 20. Select the desired set from the Personal Speed Dialling No. list.

Speed Dialling Name

Specifies the name of the Personal Speed Dialling number to call using the Personal Speed Dialling Directory shown on the extension's display.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.4 [4-1-3] Wired ExtensionSpeed Dial

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed DiallingPersonal/System

Dialling Number
Specifies the number to be dialled by the Personal Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.4 [4-1-3] Wired ExtensionSpeed Dial

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed DiallingPersonal/System

590

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Each flexible CO button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 36 flexible CO buttons can be customised for each extension. The settings can then be printed out as a key label template and attached to your extension for quick reference. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy the flexible CO button settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. To print the flexible CO button settings of an extension, click Key Label Print. The key label settings related to display - Label, Color of Font, Color of Background, Font Size, and Telephone Type - can be saved for future use. Select an action from the Key Label File drop-down list. Note that it is necessary to save these settings separately from system data. For more information on flexible buttons, see "1.20.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.

Display OptionKey Setting

Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible CO button.

Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/ DND (Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd (Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Logout, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out, Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN (KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600 only), SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

2.10.6 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonFlexible Button Data Copy

Feature Guide References

None

Parameter Selection (for Single CO)

Specifies the trunk to be accessed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30: 154 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1128 For KX-TDA600: 1640

PC Programming Manual

591

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Group CO)

Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 164 For KX-TDA600: 196

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Call Park)

Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.

Value Range
Automatic, Specific

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.2 Call Park

592

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out from.

Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually. All: All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to. Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

593

None
594 PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)

Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the extension will check its own messages only.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (External))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Internal))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log)

Specifies the extension's own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the extension will display its own call log information.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

596

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the extension's mailbox.

PC Programming Manual

597

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10 [4] Extension

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to this SDN button. Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

599

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

Dial (for NDSS)

Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station Selection. Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table can be specified here.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.

Value Range
18

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)
Specifies the ring tone type.

600

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.

Value Range
099

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.2 Call Park

Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using Onetouch Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

PC Programming Manual

601

2.10 [4] Extension

Display OptionKey Setting & Key Label Name (MPR Software File Version 4.0000 or later)
The Key Label Name function allows you to print out a key label template for flexible CO buttons, according to the telephone you are using. Click a flexible button to display a ChangeFlexible Button 0136 screen and edit the button's settings.

Type
This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingType

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Both)) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (External)) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Internal)) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)

602

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

Dial
This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingDial (for One-touch) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingDial (for ISDN Service) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingDial (for NDSS)

Feature Guide References

None

Parameter 1
This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

Label
Specifies the label that will be printed next to the corresponding button.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

604

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Font Size
Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding button.

Value Range
415

PC Programming Manual

605

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Telephone Type (MPR Software File Version 4.0000 or later)

Telephone Type
Selects the type of telephone for which you want to print a key label template.

Value Range
T7633/T7636, T7625/T7630/NT136, T7665/NT265, T7667/APT, Other

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

606

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.6 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonFlexible Button Data Copy

The flexible CO button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions.

Destination Extension Line

Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be selected. To select all extensions at once, click Select All. When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation cannot be performed.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.6 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonFlexible Button Data Copy

Programming Manual References

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

607

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.7 [4-1-5] Wired ExtensionPF Button

Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.

Type
Specifies whether to store a dialling number for the one-touch access.

Value Range
Not Stored, One Touch

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.7 [4-1-5] Wired ExtensionPF Button

Programming Manual References

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired ExtensionSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09)

610

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired ExtensionSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable Station

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired ExtensionSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainExtension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Simplified Voice Message

Selects which SVM card to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension. Each extension must be assigned to a specific SVM card, and can only use the assigned card. If two SVM cards are installed in the PBX, you should assign a number of extensions to each card, to ensure that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for each extension.

Value Range
None, Card1, Card2

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired ExtensionSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

611

2.10 [4] Extension

Maximum SVM Log

Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for the extension.

Value Range
1100

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired ExtensionSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

612

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 28 (with the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or 512 (with the KX-TDA600) PSs can be programmed. To assign names and tenants to extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See 2.9.4 [3-2] User Group for more details.

Main
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationExtension No.

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationExtension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Property
Indicates the property (reference only).

Value Range
Portable Station

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

614

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

616

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Intercept No Answer Time

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationExtension No.

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationExtension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Intercept No Answer TimeDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode. When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.

Value Range
0240 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

PC Programming Manual

617

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CLIP on Extension/CO
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party's telephone.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortISDN COSubscriber Number 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)CO SettingSubscriber Number 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 1CLIP ID

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party's telephone when making a public network trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

PC Programming Manual

619

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Ring Pattern Table

Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS.

Value Range
18

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone PatternsCall from CO 2.8.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone PatternsCall from Doorphone 2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone PatternsCall from Others

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Programmed Mailbox No.

Specifies the mailbox number of the PS's mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Transfer Recall Destination

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

PC Programming Manual

621

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.12.1 Call Transfer

ARS Itemised Code

Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS for accounting and billing purposes.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

Feature Guide References

Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notification for a call from trunk, a doorphone call or a call via an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Pickup Dial Set

Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in Pickup Dial No. on this screen is dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.

PC Programming Manual

623

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / ToneDialHot Line (Pickup Dial) Start

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.7 Hot Line

Pickup Dial No.

Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.7 Hot Line

Option 3
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationExtension No.

Feature Guide References

None

624

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

625

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.8.2 Executive Busy Override

Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for each PS.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Absent Message

Charge Limit
Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the PS. When this limit is reached, the PS cannot be used to make further trunk calls. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge OptionsDigits After Decimal Point in 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
09999999

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

1.9.2 Budget Management

Option 4
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09)

626

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationExtension No.

Feature Guide References

None

1.4.1.2 Line PreferenceIncoming

Call Waiting Tone Type

Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.

Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

LCS Recording Mode

Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS's mailbox when the PS user answers a call that was being monitored.

Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record

None

Display Language
Selects the display language of the PS.

PC Programming Manual

629

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10 [4] Extension

Option 6
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationExtension No.

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationExtension Name

Feature Guide References

None

SVM Lock (KX-TDA30 only)

Selects whether Simplified Voice Message Log information can be displayed at the extension or other extensions.

Value Range
Lock, Unlock

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable StationSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

PC Programming Manual

631

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Flexible Button Programming Mode

Specifies whether the PS user can modify all flexible CO buttons without limitation, or only the Onetouch Dialling buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when customising a One-touch Dialling button.

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

632

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Incoming Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the PS's Incoming Call Log memory.

Value Range
0100

PC Programming Manual

633

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Incoming Call Log

Outgoing Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the PS that are retained in the PS's Outgoing Call Log memory.

Value Range
1100

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the type of the PS.

Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY

Option 8
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

634

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationExtension No.

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationExtension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)

Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

635

2.10 [4] Extension

Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before a PS will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group. This timer is used when "OptionsWrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 2.9.12 [3-53] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMiscellaneous.

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

636

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationExtension Name

Feature Guide References

None

PDN Delayed Ringing (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

FWD / DND Reference

Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and DND settings can be programmed separately for each PS in 2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND.

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationExtension No.

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

PC Programming Manual

637

Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only).

638

PC Programming Manual

Indicates the current DND status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).

PC Programming Manual

639

Indicates the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded (reference only).

640

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
0120 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual

641

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.11 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsCLIP Generate

Location EntryBeginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)

Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
PS extension number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.11 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsCLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Location EntryNumber to Generate

Specifies the number of locations to be programmed. A CLIP number will only be assigned to registered PS extensions, even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of PS extensions.

Value Range
1total number of connected wired extensions

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.11 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsCLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

ParameterDeleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the CLIP number.

Value Range
04

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

PC Programming Manual

643

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND

For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.

Call from COPresent Button Status

Specifies the status of the FWD/DNDExternal button.

Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)SUMMARY

Call from COFWD Status Availability

Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming trunk calls.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call from CODND Status Availability

Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button. ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.

644

Specifies the status of the FWD/DNDInternal button.

Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND

PC Programming Manual

645

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)SUMMARY

Call from ExtensionFWD Status Availability

Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call from ExtensionDND Status Availability

Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming intercom calls.

Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button. ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Call from ExtensionFWD Mode

Specifies the circumstances when incoming intercom calls are forwarded.

646

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Each flexible CO button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12 flexible CO buttons can be customised for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button. For more information on flexible buttons, see "1.20.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.

Display OptionKey Setting

Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button.

Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/ DND (Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd (Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, Time Service, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only), SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

2.10.14 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonFlexible Button Data Copy

Feature Guide References

None

Parameter Selection (for Single CO)

Specifies the trunk to be accessed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30: 154 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1128 For KX-TDA600: 1640

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

648

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.2 Call Park

Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to are logged in to or logged out from.

PC Programming Manual

649

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10 [4] Extension

Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic / Manual)

Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to automatic.

Value Range
18

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

651

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)

Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the PS will check its own messages only.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

PC Programming Manual

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

654

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the floating extension number of the corresponding (owner) extension for the SDN button. Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

PC Programming Manual

655

2.10 [4] Extension

Dial (for One-touch)

Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 500 (with the KX-TDA30/KXTDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1000 (with the KX-TDA600) One-touch Dialling buttons for PSs.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling

Dial (for ISDN Service)

Specifies the number required to access the telephone company's ISDN service.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

Dial (for NDSS)

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

656

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

PC Programming Manual

657

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Display OptionKey Setting & Key Label Name (MPR Software File Version 4.0000 or later)
Type
This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingType

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

Feature Guide References

None

660

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.14 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonFlexible Button Data Copy

The flexible CO button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs.

Destination Extension Line

Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To select all PSs at once, click Select All. When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation cannot be performed.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.14 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonFlexible Button Data Copy

Programming Manual References

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

661

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.15 [4-2-4] Portable StationNDSS Link Data - Send

It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension's status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.

Value Range
OFF, ON

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.15 [4-2-4] Portable StationNDSS Link Data - Send

Programming Manual References

2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

662

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable StationSimplified Voice Message (KXTDA30 only)

When an SVM card is installed in the PBX, Built-in Simplified Voice Message features can be provided for each PS. This screen allows you to specify which card each extension belongs to, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension. For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see "1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)" in the Feature Guide.

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable StationSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable Station

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable StationSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationExtension Name 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsExtension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Simplified Voice Message

PC Programming Manual

663

2.10 [4] Extension

ensure that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for each extension.

Value Range
None, Card1, Card2

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable StationSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Maximum of SVM Log

Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for the extension.

Value Range
1100

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable StationSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

664

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 4 (with the KX-TDA30), 8 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or 64 (with the KX-TDA600) DSS Consoles can be programmed. The DPT TypeType (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in 2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port. Each flexible DSS button can be customised to access a certain feature. A maximum of 66 flexible DSS buttons can be customised for each DSS Console. The settings can then be printed out as a key label template and attached to your DSS Console for quick reference. Select the desired DSS Console from the DSS Console No. list. To copy the flexible DSS button settings from one location to another, click the Copy to button. To print the flexible DSS button settings, click Key Label Print. The key label settings related to display - Label, Color of Font, Color of Background, Font Size, and DSS Type - can be saved for future use. Select an action from the Key Label File drop-down list. Note that it is necessary to save these settings separately from system data. For more information on flexible buttons, see "1.20.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.

Pair Extension
Specifies the extension number of the PT to be used in pair with the DSS Console. Note that if one or more SDN buttons have been set at the DSS Console, they must be deleted before this setting can be changed.

Value Range
None, Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Display OptionKey Setting

Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible DSS button.

PC Programming Manual

665

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)

Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the paired extension will check its own messages only.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

PC Programming Manual

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are forwarded.

670

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10 [4] Extension

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to the SDN button. Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

Dial (for One-touch)

Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-TDA30/KXTDA100/KX-TDA200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDA600) One-touch Dialling buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

PC Programming Manual

673

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling

Dial (for ISDN Service)

Specifies the number required to access the telephone company's ISDN service.

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Display OptionKey Setting & Key Label Name (MPR Software File Version 4.0000 or later)
The Key Label Name function allows you to print out a key label template for flexible DSS buttons, according to the DSS Console you are using. Click a flexible button to display a ChangeFlexible Button 0166 screen and edit the button's settings.

Type
This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingType

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group)

676

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both)) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External)) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal)) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingExt. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

Dial
This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingDial (for One-touch) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingDial (for ISDN Service) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingDial (for NDSS)

Feature Guide References

None

Parameter 1
This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

PC Programming Manual

677

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingParameter Selection (for Single CO) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingParameter Selection (for Group CO) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingParameter Selection (for Call Park) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingParameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingParameter Selection (for Time Service) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingParameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingParameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingParameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

Parameter 2
This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingOptional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingOptional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonDisplay OptionKey SettingOptional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

Feature Guide References

None

Mailbox Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext No. of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

678

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

Color of Background
Specifies the colour used for the label background for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour.

Value Range
Any colour

PC Programming Manual

679

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
T7640, Other

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

680

PC Programming Manual

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.18 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonFlexible button Data Copy

The flexible DSS button settings (including key label settings) of a DSS Console can be copied to different DSS Consoles. Select the DSS Console that has the setting to copy to other DSS Consoles from the DSS Console No./ Pair Extension list, then click Copy to.

Destination DSS Console

Select the number of the DSS Console and paired extension. Multiple DSS Consoles can be selected. To select all DSS Consoles at once, click Select All. When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation cannot be performed.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.18 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonFlexible button Data Copy

Programming Manual References

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

681

2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone
The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed. To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

PhysicalShelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf to which the doorphone is connected (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call

PhysicalSlot
Indicates the slot to which the doorphone is connected (reference only).

Value Range
For KX-TDA30: Slot number For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: Slot and sub-slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call

PhysicalPort
Indicates the port number to which the doorphone is connected (reference only).

682

PC Programming Manual

2.11 [5] Optional Device

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call

Name
Specifies the doorphone name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call 2.2.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make trunk calls, and sets restrictions on intercom calls from certain extensions (Internal Call Block).

Value Range
164

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsTRSTRS LevelDay, Lunch, Break, Night 2.8.13 [2-7-3] Class of ServiceInternal Call Block

Feature Guide References

1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block 1.17.1 Doorphone Call

VM Trunk Group Number

Specifies the number of the VPS trunk group sent to the VPS when the doorphone call destination is the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) group. The VPS trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.

Value Range
148

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Programming Manual References

None

684

PC Programming Manual

2.11 [5] Optional Device

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

PC Programming Manual

685

2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager

Settings for external pagers (external speakers) can be specified. Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 2.4.7 ToolExtension List View).

Page Number 1, Page Number 2Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the external pager.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging 1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) 1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

Page Number 1, Page Number 2Name

Specifies the name of the external pager.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging 1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) 1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

686

PC Programming Manual

2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA System

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller were using an SLT extension of the PBX. For more information on DISA, see "1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)" in the Feature Guide.

Option 1
DISA SecurityDISA Security Mode
Selects the DISA security mode to prevent unauthorised access to the PBX. In Trunk or All Security mode, the caller is required to override security by Walking COS or Verification Code Entry in order to enable the restricted feature temporarily.

688

PC Programming Manual

2.11 [5] Optional Device

CO-CO with DISADISA to Public CO

Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-public trunk call using DISA is established. To enable this setting, "CO-CO with DISAFwd/Transfer to Public CO" on this screen should be set to "Enable". Setting this to "Disable" will free up DISA ports faster, but prevent DISA being used to detect the end of a call and disconnect the trunk quickly.

Value Range
Disable (Release DISA): The DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-public trunk call using DISA is established. Enable: DISA stays connected for the duration of the call, to allow detection of the end of the call.

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA System

Programming Manual References

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA SystemOption 1CO-CO with DISAFwd/Transfer to Public CO

Feature Guide References

None

CO-CO with DISADISA to Private Network

Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-private trunk call using DISA is established. To enable this setting, "CO-CO with DISAFwd/Transfer to Private Network" on this screen should be set to "Enable". Setting this to "Disable" will free up DISA ports faster, but prevent DISA being used to detect the end of a call and disconnect the trunk quickly.

Value Range
Disable (Release DISA): The DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-private trunk call using DISA is established. Enable: DISA stays connected for the duration of the call, to allow detection of the end of the call.

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA System

Programming Manual References

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA SystemOption 1CO-CO with DISAFwd/Transfer to Private Network

Feature Guide References

None

CO-CO with DISAFwd/Transfer to Public CO

Enables trunk-to-public trunk calls to be established using DISA.

PC Programming Manual

689

2.11 [5] Optional Device

Value Range
Disable: Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established without using DISA. Enable (Get DISA): Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to detect the end of the call.

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA System

PC Programming Manual

2.11 [5] Optional Device

Feature Guide References

None

CO-CO with DISAReturn to DISA Top Menu by DTMF "*"

Enables a trunk caller to return to the DISA top menu by pressing " " while hearing a ringback, reorder, or busy tone. If disabled, retrying the call is possible by pressing " ".

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Option 2
DISA Cyclic Tone Detection
Selects the cyclic tone detection mode. Cyclic tone detection is used to determine the end of a call for a DISA trunk-to-trunk conversation established through an analogue trunk. To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:

1. Change this setting. 2. Set the status of the MSG card (KX-TDA30) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600) to "OUS", then "INS".

Value Range
Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX receives is fixed to 4 times in the ranges of:
A C C C

B
A,B

= 1001300 ms, C = A 90 ms, D = B 90 ms Option: The tone pattern that the PBX receives is optional as specified in DISA Cyclic Tone Option on this screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA System

Programming Manual References

2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual

691

2.11 [5] Optional Device

Feature Guide References

None

DISA Cyclic Tone OptionTone On Maximum Time

Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX. When the tone sent from the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognises it as a toneon. Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option". To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:

1. Change this setting. 2. Set the status of the MSG card (KX-TDA30) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600) to "OUS", then "INS".

Value Range
100 + 10 n (n=1390) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA System

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot 2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

DISA Cyclic Tone OptionTone Off Maximum Time

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent from the telephone company before recognising it as a tone-off. When no tone is detected within the time set here, the PBX recognises it as a tone-off. Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option". To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:

1. Change this setting. 2. Set the status of the MSG card (KX-TDA30) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600) to "OUS", then "INS".

Value Range
100 + 10 n (n=1390) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA System

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

692

PC Programming Manual

2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

DISA Cyclic Tone OptionRepeating Times of On/Off for Detection

Specifies the number of times the tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) must be received to establish reception of the cyclic tone. This determines the end of call. Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".

Value Range
316

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Timed Reminder Message - Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the prerecorded message to play when a Timed Reminder call is answered in each time mode.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30: None, 132 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: None, 164

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA System

Programming Manual References

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice MessageDISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.28.4 Timed Reminder

PC Programming Manual

693

2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice MessageDISA Message

Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDA30) or 64 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) OGMs can be programmed. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 2.4.7 ToolExtension List View). To assign AA destinations easily, click Extension Number Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the OGM.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice MessageDISA Message

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Name
Specifies the name of the OGM.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice MessageDISA Message

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)Dial 09

Specifies the destination for each DISA Automated Attendant (AA) number. After listening to an OGM, the caller can be directed to the destination by dialling a 1-digit DISA AA number.

694

PC Programming Manual

2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11 [5] Optional Device

1.17.7 Automatic Fax Transfer

696

PC Programming Manual

2.11 [5] Optional Device

SVM Cyclic Tone Detection

Selects the cyclic tone detection mode. Cyclic tone detection is used to determine the end of a call when an extension user records a greeting message or callers leave voice messages in a message box. To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:

1. Change this setting. 2. Set the status of the SVM2 card to "OUS", then "INS". Value Range
Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX receives is fixed to 4 times in the ranges of:
A C C C

B
A,B

= 1001300 ms, C = A 90 ms, D = B 90 ms Option: The tone pattern that the PBX receives is optional as specified in SVM Cyclic Tone Option on this screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice MessageSVM (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM Cyclic Tone OptionTone On Maximum Time

Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX. When the tone sent from the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognises it as a toneon. Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option". To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:

1. Change this setting. 2. Set the status of the SVM2 card to "OUS", then "INS". Value Range
20 n (n=6200) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice MessageSVM (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

PC Programming Manual

699

2.11 [5] Optional Device

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM Cyclic Tone OptionTone Off Maximum Time

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent from the telephone company before recognising it as a tone-off. When no tone is detected within the time set here, the PBX recognises it as a tone-off. Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option". To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:

1. Change this setting. 2. Set the status of the SVM2 card to "OUS", then "INS". Value Range
20 n (n=6200) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice MessageSVM (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM Cyclic Tone OptionRepeating Times of On/Off for Detection

Specifies the number of times the tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) must be received to establish reception of the cyclic tone. This determines the end of call. Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".

Value Range
316

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice MessageSVM (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

700

PC Programming Manual

2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

Settings related to external relays can be programmed.

External Relay No.

Indicates the number of the external relay (reference only).

Value Range
For KX-TDA30: 14 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 116 KX-TDA600: 164

Maintenance Console Location

Specifies the length of time that the relay stays on when activated.

Value Range
17 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.10 External Relay Control

COS Number
Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the extensions that are able to activate relays.

Value Range
164

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsOptional Device & Other ExtensionExternal Relay Access

Feature Guide References

1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block 1.17.10 External Relay Control

PC Programming Manual

703

2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor

Settings related to external sensors can be programmed. To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Extension Number of Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

External Sensor No.

Indicates the number of the external sensor (reference only).

Value Range
For KX-TDA30: 14 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 116 KX-TDA600: 164

Maintenance Console Location

Programming Manual References

2.12.6 [6-6] TenantSystem Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed DiallingPersonal/System 1.18.1 Caller ID 2.2.3 Tenant Service

Name
Specifies a name for the System Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

PC Programming Manual

707

2.12 [6] Feature

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed DiallingPersonal/System 1.18.1 Caller ID

CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

Specifies the telephone number (including the Trunk Access number) or feature number assigned to the System Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed DiallingPersonal/System 1.18.1 Caller ID

CLI Destination
Specifies the CLI destination (extension) to which incoming calls from the programmed telephone number are routed. If a Caller ID Modification Table is being used, the modified number must match the telephone number above (CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number) in order for the call to be routed correctly.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Programming Manual References

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port SettingsCLI for DILCLI Ring for DILDay, Lunch, Break, Night 2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID TableCLI Ring for DDI/DIDDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution 1.18.1 Caller ID

708

PC Programming Manual

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification

The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically by a Caller ID Modification Table, and then recorded for calling back.

Caller ID Modification
The PBX looks for incoming telephone numbers that begin with an area code programmed in the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to that trunk group. If it finds such a code, it removes digits and adds a number to the telephone number. If this modified telephone number is stored as a System Speed Dialling number, the caller's name can be shown on a PT display and the call can be routed to a certain extension (CLI destination). A maximum of 4 Caller ID Modification Tables, each containing 10 local/international call data and 1 long distance code, can be programmed. Each trunk group can select a table for use. Select the desired table from the Modification Table list. If the telephone number does not contain an area code programmed here, it is modified based on the Long Distance Code settings.

Area Code (for Local / International Call Data 110)

Specifies the leading number (area code) to look for in the incoming caller's number.

2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Calling Party number Type of NumberPublic, Private 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Called Party number Type of NumberPublic, Private

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller's number in the place of the removed digits for each type of network numbering plan.

710

PC Programming Manual

2.12 [6] Feature

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual

711

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code

A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in use to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 codes are displayed at a time. To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Verification Code
Specifies the verification code.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.6 Verification Code Entry

User Name
Specifies the user name assigned to the verification code.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.6 Verification Code Entry

Verification Code PIN

Specifies the PIN to be entered when making a trunk call with the verification code.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code

712

PC Programming Manual

2.12 [6] Feature

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.6 Verification Code Entry

COS Number
Specifies the COS that applies when making a trunk call with the verification code.

Value Range
164

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings

Feature Guide References

1.9.6 Verification Code Entry 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Itemised Billing Code for ARS

Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made with a verification code for accounting and billing purposes.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code

Programming Manual References

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

PC Programming Manual

713

2.12 [6] Feature

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Budget Management
Specifies the limit of the call charge that will be counted on the verification code. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge OptionsDigits After Decimal Point in 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
09999999

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.2 Budget Management

714

PC Programming Manual

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone

A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a preprogrammed number of pauses are inserted after the code. A maximum of 100 Second Dial Tone Waiting codes can be programmed. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Second Dial Tone Waiting Code

Specifies the Second Dial Tone Waiting code.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

Pause Repeating Counter

Specifies the number of pauses to be inserted when waiting for the second dial tone.

Value Range
020

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

PC Programming Manual

715

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.5 [6-5] Absent Message

When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller's telephone display describing the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can select one of them.

Absent Message
Specifies the message for display.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.5 [6-5] Absent Message

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Absent Message

716

PC Programming Manual

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant

A maximum of 8 tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources. To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension Number Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

Music On Hold
Specifies the audio source to be used for Music on Hold.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30: Same as System Setting, BGM, Tone For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: Same as System Setting, BGM 1, BGM 2, Tone

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

1.13.4 Music on Hold 2.2.3 Tenant Service

Operator (Extension Number)

Specifies the extension number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be designated as the tenant operator. When this parameter is left unspecified, the PBX operator serves as the tenant operator.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

2.2.3 Tenant Service 2.2.5 Operator Features

PC Programming Manual

717

2.12 [6] Feature

ARS Mode
Specifies the ARS mode used when making a trunk call.

Value Range
Off: ARS is disabled. On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access method. On for Any CO Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Trunk Access method. Same as System Setting: The setting specified in ARS Mode in 2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings is applied.

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant

Programming Manual References

2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 2.2.3 Tenant Service

System Speed Dial

Specifies which system speed dialling table is used by the tenant. This setting is only available when an MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is installed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30: Basic Memory: PBX basic system speed dialling numbers are used. Expanded Memory: Expansion system speed dialling numbers are used. For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: Same as System Setting: PBX common system speed dialling numbers are used. Tenant Exclusive: Individual tenant system speed dialling numbers are used.

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant

Programming Manual References

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed DiallingPersonal/System 2.2.3 Tenant Service

718

PC Programming Manual

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits. When the PBX recognises the end of dialling to an analogue trunk, the PBX cancels the muting of the caller's voice sent to the analogue trunk immediately. If the PBX cannot recognise the end of dialling, the PBX mutes the caller's voice sent to an analogue trunk from the time at which the last digit is dialled until the analogue trunk inter-digit timer expires. 4 tables can be programmed, each with a maximum of 50 leading numbers. Select the table to programme from the Dialling Plan Table list. To assign a set of leading numbers automatically, click Auto Assign.

Leading Number
Specifies the leading number to be regarded as the beginning of dialling.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, N [2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9], P [0, 1], and X [0-9, *, and #])

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / ToneDialAnalogue CO First Digit 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / ToneDialAnalogue CO Inter-digit 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG SettingsMainDialling Plan Table

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY

Removed Number of Digits (MPR Software File Version 4.0000 or later)

Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialled number to be removed.

Value Range
015

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY

PC Programming Manual

719

2.12 [6] Feature

Added Number (MPR Software File Version 4.0000 or later)

Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)SUMMARY

720

PC Programming Manual

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.8 [6-7] Dialling PlanAuto Assign

It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically.

Select Auto Assigning Table

Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialling plan table.

Value Range
Type A: 1:N11, 2:NXX XXXX, 3:1NXX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored Type B: 1:N11, 2:NNX XXXX, 3:1NPX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored Type C: 1:N11, 2:NXX XXXX, 3:1NNX XXXX, 4:1NPX NXX XXXX, 5-50: Not stored Type D: 1-47: Not stored, 48:N11, 49:NXX XXXX, 50:1NXX NXX XXXX Type E: 1:N11, 2:NXX NXX XXXX, 3:1NXX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.8 [6-7] Dialling PlanAuto Assign

Programming Manual References

2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual

721

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set.

Main
Hotel OperatorExtension 14
Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.1 Hospitality FeaturesSUMMARY 1.27.2 Room Status Control

SMDR for External Hotel Application 1Room Status Control

Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.27.2 Room Status Control

SMDR for External Hotel Application 1Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)

Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

722

PC Programming Manual

2.12 [6] Feature

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.28.4 Timed Reminder

SMDR for External Hotel Application 2Printing Message 18

Specifies the text of the message output on SMDR when this Printing Message is selected from an extension. The "%" character can be used in a message, and requires a number to be entered in its place when the message is selected from an extension. This character can be used a maximum of seven times in a Printing Message.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.26.2 Printing Message

Bill
Checkout BillingBilling for Guest (Need MEC Card)
Activates call billing features for the PBX. Call billing is only available when an MEC (KX-TDA30/KXTDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is installed in the PBX.

Value Range
OFF, ON

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

2.7.3 [1-1] SlotMPR Card Property

PC Programming Manual

723

2.12 [6] Feature

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout BillingBill (SMDR) for "Others"

Specifies the name of charge item 3 as printed on the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

PC Programming Manual

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

SMDR for External Hotel ApplicationFooter 13

Specifies the text printed at the bottom of the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 80 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

726

PC Programming Manual

2.12 [6] Feature

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Charge
Margin & TaxMargin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
Specifies the percentage margin to be added to telephone charges displayed on the guest bill.

Value Range
0.0099.99 %

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Margin & TaxTax Rate for "Telephone" (%)

Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest telephone charges.

Value Range
0.0099.99 %

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Margin & TaxTax Rate for "Minibar" (%)

Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 2.

Value Range
0.0099.99 %

PC Programming Manual

727

2.12 [6] Feature

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Margin & TaxTax Rate for "Others" (%)

Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 3.

Value Range
0.0099.99 %

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Charge OptionsDigits After Decimal Point

Specifies the number of digits to display after the decimal point for the currency in use.

Value Range
06

Maintenance Console Location

Value Range
Alarm: Only a warning tone is heard. Alarm + Disconnect: A warning tone is heard, and then the call is disconnected.

PC Programming Manual

729

2.12 [6] Feature

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 3Charge Limit 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 3Charge Limit

Feature Guide References

1.9.2 Budget Management

Charge OptionsMeter Start on Answer Detection

Enables the PBX to start counting the call charge when the answer signal from the telephone company is detected.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 3Charge Limit 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 3Charge Limit

Feature Guide References

PC Programming Manual

733

2.13 [7] TRS

2.13.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial

Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account CodeForced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded. A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed.

Emergency Number
Specifies the numbers used for making emergency calls. It is not necessary to start the emergency number with a Trunk Access number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, T [Transfer], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.2 Emergency Call

734

PC Programming Manual

2.13 [7] TRS

2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/ Barring, or switch between TRS/Barring methods.

TRS Override by System Speed Dialling

Enables an outgoing trunk call to override TRS/Barring when the call is made using System Speed Dialling.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

TRS Check for dial "* #"

Enables a TRS/Barring check for the user-dialled " " and "#". This is useful in preventing unauthorised calls which could possibly be made through certain telephone company exchanges.

Value Range
No Check, Check

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Mode when Dial Time-out before TRS Check

Selects whether a trunk is disconnected if the TRS/Barring check has not been completed when the trunk Inter-digit timer expires.

Value Range
Disconnect: The trunk is disconnected as soon as the timer expires. Keep: The TRS/Barring check is performed when the timer expires.

PC Programming Manual

735

2.13 [7] TRS

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Dial Digits Limitation After AnsweringDial Digits

Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialled after an extension user receives a trunk call. If the number of dialled digits exceeds the programmed limit, the line will be disconnected.

Value Range
None, 17

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

TRS Check after EFA

Enables TRS/Barring to check the digits dialled after External Feature Access (EFA) during a trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

736

PC Programming Manual

2.13 [7] TRS

TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6) (MPR Software File Version 3.2000 or later)
Selects the method of TRS/Barring to be used for restricting calls. The level of TRS/Barring is determined by the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables.

Value Range
Deny Table 2_N + Except Table N_6: The Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels below it, and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it. Deny Table N + Except Table N: Each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes, which are only applied to that level.

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

PC Programming Manual

737

2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.

ARS Mode
Selects the condition to determine when to operate ARS.

Value Range
Off: ARS is disabled. On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using Idle Line Access method. On for Any CO Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using Idle Line Access, Trunk Access, or S-CO Line Access method.

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Mode When Any Carrier is not programmed for the Dial

Selects what happens when the dialled number is not found in Leading Number in 2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number.

Value Range
Disconnect: the line will be disconnected. Local Access: the dialled number will be handled by Idle Line Access method.

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

738

PC Programming Manual

2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number

Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure. The additional (remaining) number of digits can also be specified for each leading number. The additional (remaining) number of digits must be specified only when "#", for example, is needed after the dialled number. The "#" will be added after the programmed number of digits of the user-dialled number (excluding the leading number). 100 leading numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of leading numbers, click the applicable tab.

Leading Number
Specifies the leading number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, and X)

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Additional Number of Digits

Specifies the additional (remaining) number of digits following each leading number.

Value Range
015

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Routing Plan Number

Specifies the Routing Plan Table number used for each leading number.

PC Programming Manual

739

2.14 [8] ARS

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 116 For KX-TDA600: 148

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

740

PC Programming Manual

2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.3 [8-3] Routing Plan Time

The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There are 16 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 48 (with the KX-TDA600) Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. To adjust the currently displayed Routing Plan, click and drag the divisions between two time periods. To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Routing Plan, including adding or deleting time blocks, click Time Setting.

PC Programming Manual

741

2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.4 [8-3] Routing Plan TimeTime Setting

The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins.

Time-ADSetting
Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.4 [8-3] Routing Plan TimeTime Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Time-ADHour, Minute
Specifies the start time for each time block.

Value Range
00:0023:59

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.4 [8-3] Routing Plan TimeTime Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

742

PC Programming Manual

2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority

The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of each day of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab.

Time-ATime-D
Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: None, 110 For KX-TDA600: None, 148

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual

743

2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

Carrier
It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A maximum of 10 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 48 (with the KX-TDA600) different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature.

Carrier Name
Specifies the carrier name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of leading digits to remove from the user-dialled number.

Value Range
015

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Modify Command
Specifies the commands to modify the user-dialled number to access the carrier. For details of each command, see the Feature Guide.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters (consisting of 09, *, #, C, P, A, G, I and H)

744

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual

745

2.14 [8] ARS

Authorisation Code for Tenant

Specifies an Authorisation code for each tenant. The Authorisation codes can be added to the userdialled number by specifying "A" command in Modify Command on the Carrier tab.

Authorisation Code for TenantTenant 1Tenant 8

Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 2.2.3 Tenant Service

746

PC Programming Manual

2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception

Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access method if ARS Mode in 2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings is "on". A maximum of 200 different leading number exceptions can be programmed. 40 leading number exception entries are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other sets, click the applicable tab.

Leading Number Exception

Specifies the leading number exception.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, and X)

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual

747

2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.8 [8-7] Authorisation Code for TRG

An Authorisation code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorisation codes entered here can be added to user-dialled numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the Carrier tab of screen 2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier. 8 trunk groups are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other groups, click the applicable tab.

Authorisation Code for Trunk GroupTRG 01TRG 64 (KX-TDA30/KXTDA100/KX-TDA200), or TRG 01TRG 96 (KX-TDA600)
Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each trunk group.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.8 [8-7] Authorisation Code for TRG

Programming Manual References

2.14.6 [8-5] CarrierCarrierModify Command

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

748

PC Programming Manual

2.15 [9] Private Network

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table
A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call. There are two types of routing methods: the Extension Number Method, where all extensions in the network are given a unique extension number; and the PBX Code Method, where each PBX is given a unique code, which is dialled before the extension number to call an extension at another PBX. Two priority sets (from a total of 8) are displayed at a time. To display other priority sets, click the applicable tab. Using a private network, up to 8 PBXs can share one VPS (centralised VM) connected to another PBX. This VPS can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network. Only extension numbers of 4 digits or less, using the Extension Number Method, are supported.

Own PBX Code

Specifies the PBX code of the local PBX, when using PBX Code Method numbering on a TIE line network. If this cell is left empty, the Extension Number Method is used.

Value Range
Max. 7 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Priority 1Priority 8
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of others in the TIE line network.

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

PC Programming Manual

749

2.15 [9] Private Network

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialled number to be removed for each priority.

Value Range
015

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits for each priority.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Trunk Group
Specifies the trunk group to be used for TIE line calls for each priority.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: None, 164 For KX-TDA600: None, 196

750

PC Programming Manual

2.15 [9] Private Network

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Centralised VM
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of other PBXs in the TIE line network.

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Optional SD Card Required)

Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the VPS is attached to extensions connected to other PBXs in the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

PC Programming Manual

751

2.15 [9] Private Network

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting notifications over a network of PBXs can be programmed. Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a Network DSS (NDSS) button. Network Message Waiting notifications are used for the Centralised VM feature, and a VPS can send notifications to extensions connected to any PBX in the network.

Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator FeatureNetwork PBX ID

Specifies the Network ID of the PBX, for Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). This parameter must be set in correspondence with the Network IDs assigned to other PBXs in the network. Network IDs 1-8 can only be assigned to one PBX each within a network. Assigning the same Network ID to two PBXs will cause network data transmission problems. Changing this value in Interactive mode will automatically clear any NDSS Link Data.

Value Range
0: The PBX retransmits BLF data sent by other PBXs. 1: The PBX receives BLF data sent by other PBXs. 28: The PBX transmits BLF data over the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator FeatureData Transmission VoIP->ISDN
Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from a VoIP port through any ISDN ports that are set to transmit BLF data.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortISDN CONetworking Data Transfer 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)CO SettingNetworking Data Transfer

752

PC Programming Manual

2.15 [9] Private Network

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator FeatureData Transmission ISDN->VoIP
Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit BLF data.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

2.15.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF data to Network Operator

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator FeatureData Transmission Counter
Specifies the maximum number of "hops", or transmissions between two PBXs, before a packet of BLF data is discarded.

Value Range
163

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator FeatureData Broadcasting Interval Timer
Specifies the frequency of BLF data transmission. The PBX will send data over the network periodically according to the interval specified here.

Value Range
100 n (n=030) ms

1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

754

PC Programming Manual

2.15 [9] Private Network

2.15.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)

This screen allows network operators to be programmed. A network operator is an extension at a remote PBX that will monitor other PBX extensions using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). The settings on this screen should be programmed at the PBX that is to be monitored (Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator FeatureNetwork PBX ID 28). Up to 8 network operators can be programmed.

Network Operator Extension No.

Specifies the number of an extension at the monitor PBX (the PBX whose Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator FeatureNetwork PBX ID is set to 1 in 2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission). Any extension at the monitor PBX can be specified here.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)

Programming Manual References

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data TransmissionNetwork BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator FeatureNetwork PBX ID

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF data to Network Operator

Specifies the slot number (with the KX-TDA600, shelf and slot number) of the card used to send extension status data. This setting is only required when using VoIP to transmit data.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30: Undefined, 57 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Undefined, 111 For KX-TDA600: Undefined, 1-14-11

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

PC Programming Manual

755

2.15 [9] Private Network

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

756

PC Programming Manual

2.15 [9] Private Network

2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table

Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an extension, the extension must be registered here first. To clear NDSS link data, click the NDSS Clear button. Note that the parameters on this screen can only be set when the Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator FeatureNetwork PBX ID is set to 1 in the 2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission screen.

Network Extension No.

Specifies the number of the remote extension (attached to another PBX) that will be monitored. The number input here can use either Extension Number Method or PBX Code Method.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 09, *, #, and "," [comma])

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30 Networking Features1.30.1 TIE Line Service 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Extension Name for Programming Reference

Specifies the name of the network extension. This name is only shown here, not on the displays of extensions.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network PBX ID of Network Extension to be monitored

Indicates the Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator FeatureNetwork PBX ID of the PBX that the extension is connected to (reference only).

PC Programming Manual

757

2.15 [9] Private Network

Value Range
None, 18

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table

Programming Manual References

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data TransmissionNetwork BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator FeatureNetwork PBX ID

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

758

PC Programming Manual

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KXTDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) trunk groups. For KX-TDA600, all supported cards are displayed in the Select Shelf & Slot list. Select the shelf and slot and card type to programme, or select "All" to display all matching cards.

PhysicalShelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position of each trunk card (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PhysicalSlot
Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PhysicalPort
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

PC Programming Manual

759

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each trunk as the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations. For each trunk to which DIL distribution is set, different destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). If desired, Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution can be used in conjunction with DIL distribution. For KX-TDA600, all supported cards are displayed in the Select Shelf & Slot list with their shelf and slot numbers. Select the card to programme, or select "All" to display all matching cards.

DIL
For each trunk to which DIL distribution is set, different DIL destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). Generally, DIL distribution is used for trunk calls from analogue trunks. Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be programmed for each trunk. To assign DIL destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.

Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call FeaturesSUMMARY

DIL DestinationDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the DIL destination in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) 1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day.

Value Range
18

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

764

PC Programming Manual

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) 2.2.3 Tenant Service 2.2.4 Time Service

VM Trunk Group
Specifies the number of the VPS trunk group sent to the VPS when the DIL destination is the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) Group. The VPS trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.

Value Range
148

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

CLI for DIL

When CLI distribution is enabled for a trunk to which DIL distribution is set, incoming trunk calls will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DIL destinations) if the caller's identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table. CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual

765

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only).

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call FeaturesSUMMARY

Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).

Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call FeaturesSUMMARY 1.30.1 TIE Line Service 1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.

Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call FeaturesSUMMARY

CLI Ring for DILDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual

767

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) 1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

DDI / DID / TIE / MSN

For each trunk to which DDI/DID distribution is set, or for each trunk whose Trunk Property on this screen is Private (TIE), modification parameters for DDI/DID number and TIE line call numbers can be programmed.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

769

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.

Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call FeaturesSUMMARY 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

DDI/DID/TIE/MSNRemove Digit
Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming called number for DDI/DID distribution or for TIE line service.

Value Range
015

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service 1.30.1 TIE Line Service

DDI/DID/TIE/MSNAdditional Dial
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming called number in the place of the removed digits for DDI/DID distribution or for TIE line service.

770

PC Programming Manual

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service 1.30.1 TIE Line Service

PC Programming Manual

771

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller's identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table. CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a DDI/DID number basis. A maximum of 1000 DDI/DID numbers can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab. To assign DDI/DID destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). It is possible to programme DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Automatic Registration, or to programme DDI/DID names for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Name Generate.

DDI / DID Number

Specifies the DDI/DID number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID TableAutomatic Registration

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

DDI / DID Name

Specifies the name for the DDI/DID number which is shown on the extension's display when receiving a call with the DDI/DID number. The name of the DDI/DID number can be printed out on SMDR.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

2.16.5 [10-3] DDI/DID TableName Generate 2.17.1 [11-1] MainSMDR OptionsSMDR OptionsDDI/DID Number & Name

772

PC Programming Manual

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

DDI / DID DestinationDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the DDI/DID destination in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain 2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID TableAutomatic Registration

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day.

Value Range
18

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

VM Trunk Group No.

Specifies the number of the VPS trunk group sent to the VPS when the DID destination is the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) Group. The VPS trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.

Value Range
148

PC Programming Manual

773

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

CLI Ring for DDI/DIDDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

774

PC Programming Manual

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID TableAutomatic Registration

Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/ lunch/break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.

Beginning Entry Location

Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
11000

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID TableAutomatic Registration

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Generate DDI/DID Number (From)

Specifies the DID number of the first location to be programmed. DDI/DID numbers for subsequent locations will be generated automatically, by adding one to the value of the previous location.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID TableAutomatic Registration

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Number of Registration
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.

Value Range
11000

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID TableAutomatic Registration

PC Programming Manual

775

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

DestinationDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the number of the DDI/DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed. If the same destination is to be used for all locations for a certain time mode, click the appropriate Same all check box. If the Same all check box for a certain time mode is not clicked, the destination numbers for subsequent locations will be generated automatically, by adding one to the value of the previous location for that time mode.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID TableAutomatic Registration

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

776

PC Programming Manual

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16.5 [10-3] DDI/DID TableName Generate

Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded.

Beginning Entry Location

Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
11000

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.5 [10-3] DDI/DID TableName Generate

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Number to Generate
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.

Value Range
11000

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.5 [10-3] DDI/DID TableName Generate

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

No. of Digits to Delete

Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of a DDI/DID number when using it as part of the DDI/DID name.

Value Range
032

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.5 [10-3] DDI/DID TableName Generate

PC Programming Manual

777

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can be distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 10 MSNs can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port. To use this feature, Access Mode in 2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port must be set to P-MP. For KX-TDA600, all installed BRI cards set to MSN distribution are displayed in the Select Shelf & Slot list with their shelf and slot numbers. Select the card to programme, or select "All" to display all matching cards.

Main
To assign MSN destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

Shelf No. (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).

780

PC Programming Manual

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

MSN DestinationDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the MSN destination in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day.

Value Range
18

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port 2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

VM Trunk Group No.

Specifies the number of the VPS trunk group sent to the VPS when the MSN destination is the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) Group. The VPS trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.

Value Range
148

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

PC Programming Manual

781

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

CLI for MSN

When CLI distribution is enabled for an ISDN-BRI line to which MSN distribution is set, incoming trunk calls will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the MSN destinations) if the caller's identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table. CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis.

Port
Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CLI Ring for MSNDay, Lunch, Break, Night

Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service 1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

782

PC Programming Manual

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous

The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination.

InterceptIntercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND)

Enables the Intercept RoutingDND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.

Value Range
Disable (Busy Tone): Sends a busy tone to the caller. (However, a call through an LCOT/ELCOT or T1 [LCOT/GCOT] card will ring at the original destination while the caller hears a ringback tone.) Enable: Redirects the call to the intercept destination

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

InterceptRouting to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not programmed)

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR FormatPort
Selects the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port that is used to output the SMDR data.

Value Range
None, RS-232C

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR FormatPage Length (Number of Lines)

Specifies the number of lines on a page of output paper. Match the SMDR output to the paper size being used in the printer.

PC Programming Manual

785

Selects whether times are displayed using the 12- or 24-hour format.

786

PC Programming Manual

2.17 [11] Maintenance

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

788

PC Programming Manual

2.17 [11] Maintenance

1.27.2 Room Status Control

Print InformationTimed Reminder (Wake-up Call)

Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.28.4 Timed Reminder

Print InformationError Log

Specifies whether PBX error log information is output to SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information

SMDR Options
SMDR OptionsARS Dial
Selects the type of the dialled number to be printed for a call with the ARS feature.

Value Range
Dial before ARS Modification: The user-dialled number Dial after ARS Modification: The ARS modified number

PC Programming Manual

Selects the printing format of calls with a secret dial. The secret dial conceals all or part of the dialled number.

790

2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

RS-232C
CommunicationBaud Rate
Specifies the data transmission speed from the PBX to the printer or personal computer. To ensure stable transmission, when changing this setting to 57600 or 115200 bps, set CommunicationFlow on this screen to Hardware.

792

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

PC Programming Manual

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

External Modem CommandAutomatic Initialisation

Specifies the command to automatically initialise an external modem when it is plugged into the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port of the PBX.

Value Range
Max. 30 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

External Modem CommandManual Initialisation 1Manual Initialisation 5

Specifies the command to manually initialise an external modem. The command specified here is controlled by PT system programming (External Modem Control [801]).

Value Range
Max. 30 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

PC Programming Manual

795

2.17 [11] Maintenance

Maintenance
Local Alarm DisplayExtension 1, Extension 2
Specifies the extension numbers of PTs that will be notified by the PBX about local alarms. When the PBX detects a PBX error, the System Alarm button on the PT turns on red. When this button is pressed, the display will show the error number, and the button light will turn off automatically.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

PC Programming Manual

2.17 [11] Maintenance

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Local Alarm Information

Daily Test Start TimeMinute

Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time.

Value Range
059

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Local Alarm Information

Error Log for Centralised VMNetwork MSW Transmission (Counter)

Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if network message waiting information is deleted after re-transmission is repeated for the number of times specified in Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM FeatureData Re-transmission : Repeat Counter in 2.15.2 [92] Network Data Transmission.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE TableEnhanced QSIG Call Information (Optional SD Card Required) 2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data TransmissionNetwork MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM FeatureData Re-transmission : Repeat Counter

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Error Log for Centralised VMNetwork MSW Transmission (Buffer)

Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if the quantity of network message waiting information being re-transmitted is larger than the transmission buffer.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual

797

2.17 [11] Maintenance

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE TableEnhanced QSIG Call Information (Optional SD Card Required)

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Remote
RemoteAnalogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number for analogue remote maintenance. To enable this setting, an RMT card must be installed, and RemoteRemote Programming on this screen must be enabled.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

RemotePassword Lock Counter for Remote Programming

Specifies the number of successive incorrect password entries allowed before remote access is locked.

Value Range
None, 115

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

RemoteRemote Maintenance Dial Number (Own Telephone number for reference)

Specifies the telephone number of the PBX used to access the PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes. This number can be specified by Quick Setup.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 09, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

Value Range
410 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

800

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

System Password - PC ProgrammingInstaller Level

Specifies the system password used to access KX-TDA Maintenance Console at Installer Level.

Value Range
410 digits (consisting of 09)

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

PC Programming Manual

801

2.17 [11] Maintenance

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

802

PC Programming Manual

2.17 [11] Maintenance

2.17.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access

The programming items accessible at User and Administrator level can be specified. 100 programming item numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.

Program Number
Indicates the programming item number (reference only).

Value Range
000999

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 PT Programming

PROG**
Selects whether User Level PT users can access each system programming item.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 PT Programming

PC Programming Manual

803

2.17 [11] Maintenance

2.17.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600 only)

When the power supply to the PBX fails, power failure transfer (PFT) switches the current connections to Auxiliary Connections, so that certain SLTs and trunks can be connected. Auxiliary Connections allow trunk calls to be made during a power failure. Up to 6 pairs of trunk cards and extension cards that are physically connected by RJ11 cable can be specified. The conversations through the lines specified here will be maintained even when the power returns. For the KX-TDA600, select the shelf for which to set connections from the Shelf list. Note that PFT connections can only be made within the same shelf.

Trunk Card Slot No.

Specifies the position of the trunk card to be used.

Value Range
None, 111

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer

Extension Card Slot No.

Specifies the position of the extension card to be used.

Value Range
None, 111

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer

804

PC Programming Manual

Section

Appendix

PC Programming Manual

805

3.1 Revision History

3.1
3.1.1

Revision History
KX-TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 3.1xxx
2.4.4 ToolDXDP All OUS 2.7.37 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card PropertyCommon Settings 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsPDN/SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600 only) 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options Option 4System WirelessSDN Delayed Ringing with LCD (KX-TDA100/KXTDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Option 5Call WaitingAutomatic Call Waiting for Extension Call Option 5ISDN OptionFwd from ISDN to ISDN 2.8.20 [2-11-2] Audio GainCard 2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMiscellaneousOptionsCall Log to ICD Group for Answered Call 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings Intercept DestinationIntercept DestinationWhen Called Party is Busy Intercept No Answer Time Option 9PDN Delayed Ringing (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings Intercept DestinationIntercept DestinationWhen Called Party is Busy Intercept No Answer Time Option 9PDN Delayed Ringing (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

New Contents

806

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsExtension Number 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button 2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice MessageSVM (KX-TDA30 only)SVM Cyclic Tone OptionTone On Maximum Time 2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice MessageSVM (KX-TDA30 only)SVM Cyclic Tone OptionTone Off Maximum Time 2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

810

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

3.2
A

Feature Programming References

Absent Message
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesAbsent Message Set / Cancel 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 3Absent Message 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 3Absent Message 2.12.5 [6-5] Absent Message Feature Guide Reference 1.19.2 Absent Message

Account Code Entry

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesAccount Code Entry 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsCO & SMDRAccount Code Mode Feature Guide Reference 1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

Advice of Charge (AOC)

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortSupplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Supplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesAutomatic Callback Busy Cancel 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call FeatureAutomatic Callback Busy Feature Guide Reference 1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

Automatic Extension Release

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / Tone DialExtension First Digit DialExtension Inter-digit Tone LengthReorder Tone for PT Handset Tone LengthReorder Tone for PT Hands-free Feature Guide Reference 1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

2.4.8 ToolImport ARS - Leading Digit

PC Programming Manual

811

3.2 Feature Programming References

ARS - Except Code ARS - Routing Plan 2.4.9 ToolExport 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / ToneDialExtension Inter-digit 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 3Dial ToneDial Tone for ARS 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 2ARS Itemised Code 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 2ARS Itemised Code 2.12.3 [6-3] Verification CodeItemised Billing Code for ARS 2.14 [8] ARS 2.17.1 [11-1] MainSMDRSMDR OptionsARS Dial Feature Guide Reference 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Automatic Setup
2.4 Tool2.4.2 ToolBRI Automatic Configuration 2.8.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 2Automatic Time Adjustmentby ISDN & Caller ID (FSK) Feature Guide Reference 2.3.5 Automatic Setup

B
Background Music (BGM)
2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM BGM and Music on HoldMusic Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600 only) BGM and Music on HoldMusic Source of BGM (KX-TDA30 only) 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeatures External BGM On / Off BGM Set / Cancel 2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio GainPaging/MOH MOHMOH 1 (Music On Hold 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) MOHMOH 2 (Music On Hold 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) MOHMOH (Music On Hold) (KX-TDA30 only) 2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager Feature Guide Reference 1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

Broadcasting
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneousBroadcastingRing Duration 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesBroadcasting Operation 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsCO & SMDRBroadcasting Operation 2.9.24 [3-10] Broadcasting Group 2.9.25 [3-10] Broadcasting GroupMember List

812

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

Feature Guide Reference 1.16.1 Broadcasting

Budget Management
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 3Charge Limit 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 3Charge Limit 2.12.3 [6-3] Verification CodeBudget Management 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & ChargeChargeCharge OptionsAction at Charge Limit Feature Guide Reference 1.9.2 Budget Management

Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

2.4.5 ToolSimplified Voice MessageDelete All Recordings (KX-TDA30 only) 2.4.6 ToolSimplified Voice MessageCheck Current Usage (KX-TDA30 only) 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneous SVMRecording Time (KX-TDA30 only) SVMDial Tone Continuous Time (KX-TDA30 only) 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesSimplified Voice Message Access (KXTDA30 only) 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG SettingsTone Detection Simplified Voice Message Tone DetectionSilence (KX-TDA30 only) Simplified Voice Message Tone DetectionContinuous (KX-TDA30 only) Simplified Voice Message Tone DetectionCyclic (KX-TDA30 only) 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 6Display Lock / SVM Lock (KX-TDA30 only) 2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired ExtensionSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only) 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 6SVM Lock (KX-TDA30 only) 2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable StationSimplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only) 2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice MessageSVM (KX-TDA30 only) Feature Guide Reference 1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

C
Call Billing for Guest Room
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 2Extension PIN 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & ChargeCheckout BillingLCD for "Telephone" 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & ChargeCharge Margin & TaxMargin Rate for "Telephone" (%) Margin & TaxTax Rate for "Telephone" (%) Margin & TaxTax Rate for "Minibar" (%) Margin & TaxTax Rate for "Others" (%) Feature Guide Reference 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

PC Programming Manual

813

3.2 Feature Programming References

Call Charge Services

2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card Property Pay TonePay Tone Frequency (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Pay ToneSending Flash while end talk (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.9.3 [3-1-3] Trunk GroupCharge Rate 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonType 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonType 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonType 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & ChargeCharge Margin & TaxMargin Rate for "Telephone" (%) Margin & TaxTax Rate for "Telephone" (%) Charge OptionsDigits After Decimal Point Charge OptionsCurrency Charge OptionsCurrency Display Position Charge OptionsAction at Charge Limit Charge OptionsMeter Start on Answer Detection Feature Guide Reference 1.26.3 Call Charge Services

Call Forwarding (FWD)

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesFWD No Answer Timer Set 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings TRSCall Forward to CO Extension FeatureGroup Forward Set Extension FeatureRemote Operation by Other Extension 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG SettingsMain CO-CO Duration Time Extension-CO Duration Time 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup SettingsGroup Log / Group FWD 2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND 2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable StationFWD / DND Feature Guide Reference 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call Forwarding (CF)by ISDN (P-MP)

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsCO & SMDRCF (MSN) Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)by ISDN (P-MP)

Call Forwarding (CF)by ISDN (P-P)

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortSupplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY

814

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Supplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsCO & SMDRCF (MSN) Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)by ISDN (P-P)

Call Forwarding (CF)by QSIG

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortSupplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Supplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Feature Guide Reference 1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)by QSIG

Call Hold
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / Tone RecallHold Recall RecallDisconnect after Recall 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeatures Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options Option 1PT OperationAutomatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key Option 1PT OperationHold Key Mode Option 4SLTSLT Hold Mode Feature Guide Reference 1.13.1 Call Hold

Call Hold (HOLD)by ISDN

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesISDN Hold 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonType 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonType 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonType Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)by ISDN

Call Monitor
2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call FeatureCall Monitor 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsCO & SMDRCall Monitor 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings Option 2Data Mode Option 3Executive Override Deny

PC Programming Manual

815

3.2 Feature Programming References

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 3Executive Override Deny Feature Guide Reference 1.8.3 Call Monitor

Call Park
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters RecallCall Park Recall RecallDisconnect after Recall 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesCall Park / Call Park Retrieve 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park) 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park) Feature Guide Reference 1.13.2 Call Park

Call Pickup
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeatures Group Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsCO & SMDRCall Pickup by DSS 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 4 DSS KeyDSS Key mode for Incoming Call DSS KeyCall Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call DSS KeyCall Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call 2.9.5 [3-3] Call Pickup Group 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 3Call Pickup Deny 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 3Call Pickup Deny Feature Guide Reference 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

Call Transfer
2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGMBGM and Music on HoldSound on Transfer 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / ToneRecallTransfer Recall 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsTRSTransfer to CO 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 4

816

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

DSS KeyAutomatic Transfer for Extension Call TransferTransfer to Busy Extension without BSS Operation 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 1Transfer Recall Destination 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 1Transfer Recall Destination Feature Guide Reference 1.12.1 Call Transfer

Call Transfer (CT)by ISDN

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortSupplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Supplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)by ISDN

Call Transfer (CT)by QSIG

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortSupplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Supplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 2.7.33 [1-1] SlotIP-GW Card PropertyQSIG-CT Feature Guide Reference 1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)by QSIG

Call Waiting
2.7.10 [1-1] SlotLCO Card PropertyCaller IDCaller ID Signalling 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeatures Call Waiting Mode: Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call Call Waiting Mode: Automatic Call Waiting 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 5Call WaitingAutomatic Call Waiting for Extension Call 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings Option 2Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Option 2Automatic C. Waiting Option 4Call Waiting Tone Type 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings Option 2Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Option 2Automatic C. Waiting Option 4Call Waiting Tone Type Feature Guide Reference

PC Programming Manual

817

3.2 Feature Programming References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Call Waiting Tone

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneousCaller IDVisual Caller ID Display 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings Option 2Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Option 2Automatic C. Waiting Option 4Call Waiting Tone Type 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings Option 2Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Option 2Automatic C. Waiting Option 4Call Waiting Tone Type Feature Guide Reference 1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

Caller ID
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneous Caller IDWaiting to receive Caller IDVisual Caller ID Display 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 4Private NetworkPublic Call through Private NetworkMinimum Public Caller ID Digits 2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG SettingsMainCaller-ID Modification Table 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 7 Extension Caller ID Sending Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial 2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification Feature Guide Reference 1.18.1 Caller ID

Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial Name CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number CLI Destination 2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port SettingsDILCLI Ring for DILDay, Lunch, Break, Night 2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID TableCLI Ring for DDI/DIDDay, Lunch, Break, Night 2.16.6 [10-4] MSN TableCLI Ring for MSNDay, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide Reference 1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

818

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO PortCPC Signal Detection TimeOutgoing, Incoming 2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) CPC Signal Detection (DDI/DID)Outgoing, Incoming (for DDI/DID channel) CPC Signal Detection (LCO/GCO)Outgoing, Incoming (for GCOT or LCOT channel) 2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 PortCPC Detection TimeOut, In 2.7.31 [1-1] SlotDID PortCPC Detection TimeOut (DID), In (DID) Feature Guide Reference 1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port ISDN COSubscriber Number Supplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) CO SettingSubscriber Number Supplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Subscriber Number 2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 PortSubscriber Number 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeatures COLR Set / Cancel CLIR Set / Cancel Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 4Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDNwhen Transfer (CLIP of Held Party) 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup SettingsMainCLIP on ICD Group Button 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings MainExtension Number Option 1CLIP ID Option 3CLIP on Extension/CO Option 3CLIR Option 3COLR 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonType 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings Option 1CLIP ID Option 3CLIP on Extension/CO Option 3CLIR Option 3COLR 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonType 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonType Feature Guide Reference

PC Programming Manual

819

3.2 Feature Programming References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)by QSIG
2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortSupplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Supplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeatures COLR Set / Cancel CLIR Set / Cancel 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMain Extension Number Extension Name 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMain Extension Number Extension Name Feature Guide Reference 1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/ Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)by QSIG

Centralised Voice Mail

2.7.48 [1-3] OptionNew Card InstallationISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card (KXTDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.15.1 [9-1] TIE TableCentralised VM 2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM FeatureData Re-transmission : Repeat Counter Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM FeatureData Re-transmission : Repeat Timer 2.17.1 [11-1] MainMaintenance Error Log for Centralised VMNetwork MSW Transmission (Counter) Error Log for Centralised VMNetwork MSW Transmission (Buffer) Feature Guide Reference 1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Class of Service (COS)

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS Feature Guide Reference 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortSupplementary Service

820

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY CCBS Option 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Supplementary Service COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY CCBS Type CCBS delete digits Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)by QSIG

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortSupplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Supplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Feature Guide Reference 1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)by QSIG

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

2.7.44 [1-1] SlotCTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesDial Information (CTI) 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 6 (CTI) Feature Guide Reference 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Conference
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / Tone Unattended ConferenceRecall Start Timer Unattended ConferenceWarning Tone Start Timer Unattended ConferenceDisconnect Timer 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsTRSTransfer to CO 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 3 Confirmation ToneTone 4-1 : Start Conference Confirmation ToneTone 4-2 : Finish Conference Echo CancelConference 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonType 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonType 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonType Feature Guide Reference 1.14.1.2 Conference

Confirmation Tone
2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 3

PC Programming Manual

821

3.2 Feature Programming References

Confirmation ToneTone 1 : Doorphone / Called by Voice Confirmation ToneTone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer Confirmation ToneTone 3-1 : Start Talking after making call Confirmation ToneTone 3-2 : Start Talking after answering call Confirmation ToneTone 4-1 : Start Conference Confirmation ToneTone 4-2 : Finish Conference Confirmation ToneTone 5 : Hold Feature Guide Reference 1.29.2 Confirmation Tone

D
Dial Tone
2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 3 Dial ToneDistinctive Dial Tone Dial ToneDial Tone for Extension Dial ToneDial Tone for ARS Feature Guide Reference 1.29.1 Dial Tone

Dial Tone Transfer

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) Feature Guide Reference 1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Dial Type Selection

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO Port Dialling Mode DTMF Width Pulse Speed 2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) CO Dial Mode DTMF Width CO Pulse Speed 2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 Port CO Dial Mode DTMF Width

822

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

CO Pulse Speed 2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Dialling Mode DTMF Width CO Pulse Speed 2.7.31 [1-1] SlotDID Port Dialling Mode DTMF Width CO Pulse Speed Feature Guide Reference 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Direct In Line (DIL)

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port SettingsDIL DIL DestinationDay, Lunch, Break, Night Tenant Number VM Trunk Group Feature Guide Reference 1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

2.7.30 [1-1] SlotDID Card Property 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneousReceiving Dial Inter-digit TimerDDI / DID 2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port SettingsDDI / DID / TIE / MSN Distribution Method DDI/DID/TIE/MSNRemove Digit DDI/DID/TIE/MSNAdditional Dial 2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Feature Guide Reference 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf DISADelayed Answer Timer DISAMute & OGM Start Timer after Answering DISANo Dial Intercept Timer DISA2nd Dial Timer for AA DISAIntercept TimerDay, Lunch, Break, Night DISADisconnect Timer after Intercept DISACO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter DISACO-to-CO Call Prolong Time DISAProgress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message DISAReorder Tone Duration 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneousExtension PINLock Counter

PC Programming Manual

823

3.2 Feature Programming References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsExtension FeatureAccept the Call from DISA 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG SettingsTone Detection DISA Tone DetectionSilence DISA Tone DetectionContinuous DISA Tone DetectionCyclic 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 1Intercept Destination When called party does not answerDay, Lunch, Break, Night 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 1Intercept Destination When called party does not answerDay, Lunch, Break, Night 2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA System 2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice MessageDISA Message Feature Guide Reference 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Display Information
2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 5PT Feature AccessNo. 18 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 5 Display Language Incoming Call Display Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings Option 5 Display Language Incoming Call Display Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & ChargeCharge Charge OptionsDigits After Decimal Point Charge OptionsCurrency Charge OptionsCurrency Display Position 2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line SettingsCO Name Feature Guide Reference 1.20.4 Display Information

Do Not Disturb (DND)

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / ToneTone LengthBusy Tone / DND Tone 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsCO & SMDRDND Override 2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired ExtensionFWD/DND Call from CODND Status Availability Call from ExtensionDND Status Availability Feature Guide Reference 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

824

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

Door Open
2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Device Type 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDISA / Door / Reminder / U. ConfDoorphoneOpen Duration 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesDoor Open 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsCO & SMDRDoor Unlock Feature Guide Reference 1.17.2 Door Open

Doorphone Call
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf DoorphoneCall Ring Duration DoorphoneCall Duration 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesDoorphone Call 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsTRSTRS LevelDay, Lunch, Break, Night 2.8.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone PatternsCall from Doorphone 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 3Confirmation ToneTone 1 : Doorphone / Called by Voice 2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone Feature Guide Reference 1.17.1 Doorphone Call

E
E1 Line Service
2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 Port 2.7.26 [1-1] SlotE1 PortChannel Command Feature Guide Reference 1.22.1 E1 Line Service

Emergency Call
2.13.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial Feature Guide Reference 1.5.4.2 Emergency Call

Executive Busy Override

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesExecutive Override Deny Set / Cancel 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call FeatureExecutive Busy Override 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS Settings CO & SMDRExecutive Busy Override Extension FeatureExecutive Busy Override Deny 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 3Executive Override Deny 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 3Executive Override Deny Feature Guide Reference

PC Programming Manual

825

3.2 Feature Programming References

1.8.2 Executive Busy Override

Extension Dial Lock

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeatures Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel Remote Extension Dial Lock Off Remote Extension Dial Lock On 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsTRSTRS Level on Extension Lock Feature Guide Reference 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock

Extension Feature Clear

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesExtension Feature Clear 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 2 Extension ClearCall Waiting Extension ClearFwd/DND Extension ClearHot Line (Pickup Dial) Feature Guide Reference 1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneousExtension PINLock Counter 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesExtension PIN Set / Cancel 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 1PT LCDPassword / PIN Display 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 2Extension PIN 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 2Extension PIN Feature Guide Reference 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

Extension Port Configuration

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonPair Extension Feature Guide Reference 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration

External Feature Access (EFA)

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO PortFlash Time 2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Flash Time 2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 PortFlash Time 2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Flash Time 2.7.31 [1-1] SlotDID PortFlash Time 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesExternal Feature Access 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 6Flash Mode during CO Conversation 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonType

826

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 6Flash Mode during CO Conversation 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonType 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonType 2.13.5 [7-5] MiscellaneousTRS Check after EFA Feature Guide Reference 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

External Relay Control

2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Device Type 2.7.45 [1-1] SlotDPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)For Output (EIO)Device Type 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesExternal Relay Access 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsExtension FeatureExternal Relay Access 2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay Feature Guide Reference 1.17.10 External Relay Control

External Sensor
2.7.41 [1-1] SlotOPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Input Signal Decision Time Input Signal Detection Reopening Time 2.7.45 [1-1] SlotDPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only) For Sensor (EIO)Input Signal Decision Time For Sensor (EIO)Input Signal Detection Reopening Time 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneousExternal SensorRing Duration 2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone PatternsCall from OthersExternal SensorRing Tone Pattern Plan 18 2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor Feature Guide Reference 1.17.9 External Sensor

F
Flash/Recall/Terminate
2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO PortDisconnect Time 2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Disconnect Time 2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 PortDisconnect Time 2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Disconnect Time 2.7.31 [1-1] SlotDID PortDisconnect Time 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 6Flash Mode during CO Conversation 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonType 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 6Flash Mode during CO Conversation 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonType

PC Programming Manual

827

3.2 Feature Programming References

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonType Feature Guide Reference 1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

Flexible Buttons
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneousPT DisplayPT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button 2.10.6 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonFlexible Button Data Copy 2.10.7 [4-1-5] Wired ExtensionPF Button 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Feature Guide Reference 1.20.2 Flexible Buttons

Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMain Extension Features Other PBX Extension 2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering PlanQuick Dial 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature Feature Guide Reference 2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Floating Extension
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainExtension 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup SettingsMain Floating Extension Number Group Name 2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) GroupUnit SettingsFloating Extension No. 2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup SettingsFloating Ext. No. 2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring GroupFloating Extension Number 2.11.2 [5-2] External PagerPage Number 1, Page Number 2Floating Extension Number 2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice MessageDISA MessageFloating Extension Number 2.17.1 [11-1] MainRemote RemoteAnalogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number RemoteISDN Remote Floating Extension Number Feature Guide Reference 2.3.7 Floating Extension

FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeatures FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO

828

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 1 PT Fwd / DNDFwd LED PT Fwd / DNDDND LED PT Fwd / DNDFwd/DND key mode when Idle 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsFWD / DND Reference 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Type Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Both)) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (External)) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Internal)) 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsFWD / DND Reference 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button Type Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both)) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External)) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal)) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Type Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both)) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External)) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal)) Feature Guide Reference 1.3.1.4 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

G
Group
2.9 [3] Group Feature Guide Reference 2.2.2 Group

Group Call Distribution

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG SettingsMainLine Hunting Order 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings MainDistribution Method MainCall Waiting Distribution MiscellaneousExtension No Answer Redirection Time MiscellaneousMaximum No. of Busy Extensions 2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMiscellaneous OptionsWrap-up Timer based on OptionsLongest Idle Distribution (Optional SD Card Required)

PC Programming Manual

829

3.2 Feature Programming References

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMemberDelayed Ring 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 8Wrap-up Timer 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 8Wrap-up Timer Feature Guide Reference 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

H
Hands-free Answerback
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / ToneTone LengthReorder Tone for PT Hands-free 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options Option 1PT OperationAutomatic Answer for Call from CO after Option 3Confirmation ToneTone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer Option 4TransferAutomatic Answer for Transferred Call 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 5 Automatic Answer for CO Call Forced Automatic Answer Feature Guide Reference 1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback

Hands-free Operation
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / ToneTone LengthReorder Tone for PT Hands-free 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 4LCS Answer Mode Feature Guide Reference 1.11.1 Hands-free Operation

Headset Operation
2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension PortHeadset OFF/ON (for DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, or SHybrid(S-DPT) port) 2.7.38 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension PortIP-PT Registration and De-registrationHeadset OFF/ON 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonType 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonType Feature Guide Reference 1.11.4 Headset Operation

Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG SettingsHost PBX Access Code 2.17.1 [11-1] MainSMDRSMDR OptionsARS Dial Feature Guide Reference 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)

830

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

Hot Line
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / ToneDialHot Line (Pickup Dial) Start 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesHot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 2 Pickup Dial Set Pickup Dial No. 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 2 Pickup Dial Set Pickup Dial No. Feature Guide Reference 1.6.1.7 Hot Line

I
Idle Extension Hunting
2.9.14 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group 2.9.15 [3-6] Extension Hunting GroupMember List Feature Guide Reference 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings Main Overflow Queuing Busy Overflow No Answer Miscellaneous 2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMiscellaneous 2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMember Feature Guide Reference 1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

Incoming Call Log

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup SettingsGroup Log / Group FWDSupervisor Extension Number 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings Option 5Incoming Call Display Option 6Incoming Call Log Lock (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Option 6Incoming Call Log Memory 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonType 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings Option 5Incoming Call Display Option 6Incoming Call Log Memory 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonType

PC Programming Manual

831

3.2 Feature Programming References

Feature Guide Reference 1.18.2 Incoming Call Log

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)

2.4.2 ToolBRI Automatic Configuration 2.7.13 [1-1] SlotBRI/PRI Card Property 2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI Port 2.7.15 [1-1] SlotBRI PortPort Command 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.7.17 [1-1] SlotPRI PortPort Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / ToneDialExtension Inter-digit 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 2ISDN en Bloc Dial[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings MainExtension Number Option 6ISDN Bearer 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 6ISDN Bearer 2.12.8 [6-7] Dialling PlanAuto Assign Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)

Intercept Routing
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / ToneIntercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)Day, Lunch, Break, Night 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDISA / Door / Reminder / U. ConfDISAIntercept TimerDay, Lunch, Break, Night 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup SettingsOverflow No Answer Time out & Manual Queue RedirectionDestination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept No Answer Time 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept No Answer Time 2.16.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous Feature Guide Reference 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept RoutingNo Destination

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGMPBX OperatorDay, Lunch, Break, Night 2.16.7 [10-5] MiscellaneousInterceptRouting to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not programmed) Feature Guide Reference 1.1.1.7 Intercept RoutingNo Destination

832

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

Intercom Call
2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call FeatureAlternate Calling - Ring / Voice 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings MainExtension Number MainExtension Name Option 4Intercom Call by Voice 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMain Extension Number Extension Name Feature Guide Reference 1.5.3 Intercom Call

Internal Call Block

2.8.13 [2-7-3] Class of ServiceInternal Call BlockCOS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 164 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup SettingsMainCOS 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.11.1 [5-1] DoorphoneCOS 2.11.6 [5-4] External RelayCOS Number Feature Guide Reference 1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

Internal Call Features

2.11.1 [5-1] DoorphoneDestinationDay, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide Reference 1.1.2 Internal Call Features

IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

2.7.36 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card Property 2.7.38 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Port Feature Guide Reference 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

ISDN Extension
2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortISDN Extension 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Extension Setting Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Type Dial (for ISDN Service) 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button

PC Programming Manual

833

3.2 Feature Programming References

Type Dial (for ISDN Service) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Type Dial (for ISDN Service) Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

K
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainKX-T7710 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide Reference 1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling

L
Last Number Redial
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / Tone Automatic RedialRepeat Counter Automatic RedialRepeat Interval Automatic RedialRedial Call Ring Duration Automatic RedialAnalogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesRedial 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 2 RedialAutomatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN) RedialSave Dial After Connection to Redial Memory RedialCall Log by Redial key 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 6Outgoing Call Log Memory 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 6Outgoing Call Log Memory Feature Guide Reference 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

LED Indication
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options Option 1PT Fwd / DNDFwd LED Option 1PT Fwd / DNDDND LED Option 4DSS KeyDSS Key mode for Incoming Call Feature Guide Reference 1.20.3 LED Indication

Line PreferenceIncoming
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 4Incoming Preferred Line

834

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 4Incoming Preferred Line Feature Guide Reference 1.4.1.2 Line PreferenceIncoming

Line PreferenceOutgoing
2.8.12 [2-7-2] Class of ServiceExternal Call Block 2.9.2 [3-1-2] Trunk GroupLocal Access Priority 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 4Outgoing Preferred Line 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 4Outgoing Preferred Line Feature Guide Reference 1.5.5.2 Line PreferenceOutgoing

Local Alarm Information

2.5.7 UtilityMessage File Transfer PBX to PC 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonType 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonType 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonType 2.17.1 [11-1] Main SMDRPrint InformationError Log MaintenanceLocal Alarm DisplayExtension 1, Extension 2 MaintenanceDaily Test Start TimeSet MaintenanceDaily Test Start TimeHour MaintenanceDaily Test Start TimeMinute Feature Guide Reference 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information

Log-in/Log-out
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeatures Log-in / Log-out Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup SettingsMiscellaneous No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out Last Extension Log-out 2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMiscellaneousOptionsWrap-up Timer based on 2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution GroupMemberWrap-up Timer 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 7Wrap-up Timer 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out) 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 6Wrap-up Timer 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

PC Programming Manual

835

3.2 Feature Programming References

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out) 2.17.1 [11-1] MainSMDRPrint InformationLog-in / Log-out Feature Guide Reference 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

M
Malicious Call Identification (MCID)
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesMCID Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

Manager Features
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsExtension FeatureManager 2.17.1 [11-1] MainPasswordManager Password - PT ProgrammingProg *1 Feature Guide Reference 2.2.6 Manager Features

Message Waiting
2.7.4 [1-1] SlotExtension Card PropertySLT Power Supply (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only) 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesMessage Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call FeatureMessage Waiting Set 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options Option 3Dial ToneDistinctive Dial Tone Option 4SLTMessage Waiting Lamp Pattern (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600 only) 2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem SettingsVM DTMF CommandListening Message 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainSLT MW Mode (KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonType 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonType 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonType Feature Guide Reference 1.19.1 Message Waiting

Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port SettingsDDI / DID / TIE / MSN Distribution Method DDI/DID/TIE/MSNRemove Digit DDI/DID/TIE/MSNAdditional Dial

836

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table Feature Guide Reference 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

Music on Hold
2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM BGM and Music on HoldMusic Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600 only) BGM and Music on HoldMusic Source of BGM (KX-TDA30 only) BGM and Music on HoldMusic on Hold 2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio GainPaging/MOH MOHMOH 1 (Music On Hold 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) MOHMOH 2 (Music On Hold 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) MOHMOH (Music On Hold) (KX-TDA30 only) Feature Guide Reference 1.13.4 Music on Hold

N
Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) (KX-TDA0920/KX-TDA3920/KX-TDA6920 required)
2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortISDN CONetworking Data Transfer 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)CO Setting Networking Data Transfer 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsExtension FeatureManager 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Type Dial (for NDSS) 2.10.8 [4-1-6] Wired ExtensionNDSS Link Data - Send 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button Type Dial (for NDSS) 2.10.15 [4-2-4] Portable StationNDSS Link Data - Send 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Type Dial (for NDSS) 2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission 2.15.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP) 2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table Feature Guide Reference 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network ICD Group

2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 4Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDNwhen ICD Group with Cellular Phone Feature Guide Reference

PC Programming Manual

837

3.2 Feature Programming References

1.30.6 Network ICD Group

O
Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsCO & SMDROHCA / Whisper OHCA Feature Guide Reference 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

Off-hook Monitor
2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 1PT OperationOff Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/ T75xx/T76xx Feature Guide Reference 1.11.2 Off-hook Monitor

One-touch Dialling
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 5Flexible Button Programming Mode 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Type Dial (for One-touch) 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 5Flexible Button Programming Mode 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button Type Dial (for One-touch) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Type Dial (for One-touch) Feature Guide Reference 1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling

Operator Features
2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGMPBX OperatorDay, Lunch, Break, Night 2.12.6 [6-6] TenantOperator (Extension Number) Feature Guide Reference 2.2.5 Operator Features

Outgoing Message (OGM)

2.5.6 UtilityMessage File Transfer PC to PBX 2.5.7 UtilityMessage File Transfer PBX to PC 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDISA / Door / Reminder / U. ConfDISAProgress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message

838

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesOGM Record / Clear / Playback 2.9.11 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution GroupQueuing Time TableQueuing SequenceSequence 0116 2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice MessageDISA Message Floating Extension Number Delayed Ring Feature Guide Reference 1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)

Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group

2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 4Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDNwhen ICD Group with Cellular Phone Feature Guide Reference 1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group

Overflow Feature
2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings Overflow Queuing Busy Overflow No Answer 2.9.11 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution GroupQueuing Time Table Feature Guide Reference 1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature

P
Paging
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeatures Group Paging Group Paging Answer Paging Deny Set / Cancel 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options Option 1PT Fwd / DNDPaging to DND Extension Option 3Confirmation ToneTone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer 2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio GainPaging/MOH PagingEPG 1 (External Pager 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) PagingEPG 2 (External Pager 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) PagingEPG (External Pager) (KX-TDA30 only) PagingPaging Level from PT Speaker 2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group 2.9.8 [3-4] Paging GroupAll Setting 2.9.9 [3-4] Paging GroupExternal Pager 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 6Paging Deny Feature Guide Reference 1.15.1 Paging

PC Programming Manual

839

3.2 Feature Programming References

Parallelled Telephone
2.7.4 [1-1] SlotExtension Card PropertyAPT/SLT Parallel Ring 2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port XDP Mode (for S-Hybrid port) Parallel Telephone Ringing (for S-Hybrid port) 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesParallel Telephone (Ring) Mode Set / Cancel Feature Guide Reference 1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone

Password Security
2.1.2 Access Levels 2.4.10 ToolProgrammer Code Change 2.17.1 [11-1] MainPassword Feature Guide Reference 2.3.3 Password Security

Pause Insertion
2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO PortPause Time 2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Pause Time 2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 PortPause Time 2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Pause Time 2.7.31 [1-1] SlotDID PortPause Time 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneousDuring ConversationPause Signal Time 2.12.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone Feature Guide Reference 1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

PC Phone/PC Console
2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension Port DPT TypeType (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) DPT TypeLocation No. (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) Feature Guide Reference 1.32.2 PC Phone/PC Console

PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsPDN/SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KXTDA600 only) 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 4System WirelessSDN Delayed Ringing with LCD (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)

840

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN) Feature Guide Reference 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Portable Station (PS) Connection

2.7.47 [1-2] Portable Station Feature Guide Reference 1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Power Failure Transfer

2.17.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide Reference 2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer

Printing Message
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesPrinting Message 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & ChargeMainSMDR for External Hotel Application 2Printing Message 18 Feature Guide Reference 1.26.2 Printing Message

Privacy Release
2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 1PT OperationPrivacy Release by SCO key 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonType 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible ButtonType 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonType Feature Guide Reference 1.14.1.3 Privacy Release

PS Directory
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainExtension Name 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainExtension Name 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial Name CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number Feature Guide Reference 1.25.3 PS Directory
PC Programming Manual 841

3.2 Feature Programming References

PS Ring Group
2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup SettingsMainDistribution Method 2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group 2.9.23 [3-9] PS Ring GroupMember List Feature Guide Reference 1.25.2 PS Ring Group

PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneousSystem WirelessPS Out of Range Timer 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 4System WirelessOut of Range Registration Feature Guide Reference 1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

PT Programming
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsExtension FeatureProgramming Mode Level 2.17.1 [11-1] MainPassword System Password - PT ProgrammingProg ** : User Level System Password - PT ProgrammingProg *# : Administrator Level Manager Password - PT ProgrammingProg *1 Feature Guide Reference 2.3.2 PT Programming

Q
Queuing Feature
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesIncoming Call Queue Monitor 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 4TransferTransfer to Busy Extension without BSS Operation 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup Settings Overflow Queuing Busy Overflow No Answer Queuing Time Table MiscellaneousExtension No Answer Redirection Time MiscellaneousMaximum No. of Busy Extensions 2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) GroupSystem SettingsCall Waiting on VM Group 2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem SettingsOthersCall Waiting on VM Group 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Type Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up) 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button Type Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button

842

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

Type Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up) Feature Guide Reference 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Quick Dialling
2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering PlanQuick Dial Feature Guide Reference 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling

R
Reverse Circuit
2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO PortReverse Detection Feature Guide Reference 1.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit

Ring Tone Pattern Selection

2.8.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone PatternsCall from CORing Tone Pattern Plan 18 2.8.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone PatternsCall from DoorphoneRing Tone Pattern Plan 18 2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone PatternsCall from OthersExtensionRing Tone Pattern Plan 18 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 1PT OperationPT Ring Off Setting 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainRing Pattern Table 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainRing Pattern Table Feature Guide Reference 1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Room Status Control

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible ButtonType 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonType 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge MainHotel OperatorExtension 14 BillCheckout BillingBilling for Guest (Need MEC Card) Feature Guide Reference 1.27.2 Room Status Control

S
Software Upgrading
2.7.3 [1-1] SlotMPR Card PropertyMemory Version: Feature Guide Reference 2.3.8 Software Upgrading

PC Programming Manual

843

3.2 Feature Programming References

Special Carrier Access Code

2.13.3 [7-3] Special Carrier Code Feature Guide Reference 1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Speed DiallingPersonal/System
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeatures System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling Personal Speed Dialling - Programming 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsTRSTRS Level for System Speed Dialling 2.10.4 [4-1-3] Wired ExtensionSpeed Dial 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial 2.12.6 [6-6] TenantSystem Speed Dial Feature Guide Reference 1.6.1.5 Speed DiallingPersonal/System

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / ToneDialAnalogue CO Call Duration Start 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsCO & SMDROutgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR) 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge MainSMDR for External Hotel Application 2Printing Message 18 ChargeCharge OptionsCurrency 2.17.1 [11-1] Main SMDR SMDR Options RS-232C Feature Guide Reference 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Supervisory Feature
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesIncoming Call Queue Monitor 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup SettingsMiscellaneous Supervisor Extension Number Feature Guide Reference 1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature

T
T1 Line Service
2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.7.20 [1-1] SlotT1 PortChannel Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide Reference

844

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

1.23.1 T1 Line Service

Tenant Service
2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM PBX OperatorDay, Lunch, Break, Night BGM and Music on HoldMusic on Hold 2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table 2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table 2.8.13 [2-7-3] Class of ServiceInternal Call Block 2.9.4 [3-2] User Group 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup SettingsMainTenant Number 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainUser Group 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainUser Group 2.11.1 [5-1] DoorphoneTenant Number 2.11.7 [5-5] External SensorTenant No. 2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant 2.14 [8] ARS 2.14.6 [8-5] CarrierAuthorisation Code for Tenant 2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port SettingsDILTenant Number 2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID TableTenant Number 2.16.6 [10-4] MSN TableMainTenant Number Feature Guide Reference 2.2.3 Tenant Service

Three-party Conference (3PTY)by ISDN

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortSupplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Supplementary ServiceCOLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)by ISDN

TIE Line Service

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortNetwork Numbering PlanTrunk Property (for CO port) 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Network Numbering PlanTrunk Property (for CO port) 2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Trunk Property (for TIE channel) 2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 PortTrunk Property 2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Trunk Property 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneousReceiving Dial Inter-digit TimerTIE 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeatures Idle Line Access (Local Access) Trunk Group Access TIE Line Access

PC Programming Manual

845

3.2 Feature Programming References

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainOther PBX Extension 2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering PlanQuick DialUse quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work (MPR Software File Version 3.2000 or later) 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsTRSTRS LevelDay, Lunch, Break, Night 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 4Private NetworkTIE Call by Extension Numbering (Optional SD Card Required) 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG SettingsMainCOS 2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table 2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings DILTrunk Property DILDIL DestinationDay, Lunch, Break, Night DDI / DID / TIE / MSN 2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID TableDDI / DID DestinationDay, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide Reference 1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Time Service
2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table 2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesTime Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsExtension FeatureTime Service Switch 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for Time Service) Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for Time Service) Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic / Manual) Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for Time Service) Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Feature Guide Reference 2.2.4 Time Service

Timed Reminder
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf Timed ReminderRepeat Counter Timed ReminderInterval Time

846

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

Timed ReminderAlarm Ringing Duration 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeatures Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call) Timed Reminder Set / Cancel 2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone PatternsCall from OthersTimed ReminderRing Tone Pattern Plan 18 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 1PT LCDTime Display 2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice MessageDISA SystemTimed Reminder Message - Day, Lunch, Break, Night 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & ChargeMainSMDR for External Hotel Application 1Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) 2.17.1 [11-1] MainSMDRPrint InformationTimed Reminder (Wake-up Call) Feature Guide Reference 1.28.4 Timed Reminder

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsTRS TRS LevelDay, Lunch, Break, Night TRS Level for System Speed Dialling 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsMainCOS 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) 2.13.1 [7-1] Denied Code 2.13.2 [7-2] Exception Code 2.13.3 [7-3] Special Carrier Code 2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Feature Guide Reference 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Trunk Access
2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension PortConnection 2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO PortConnection 2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortConnection 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Connection 2.7.19 [1-1] SlotT1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Connection 2.7.25 [1-1] SlotE1 PortConnection 2.7.28 [1-1] SlotE&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Connection

PC Programming Manual

847

3.2 Feature Programming References

2.7.31 [1-1] SlotDID PortConnection 2.7.34 [1-1] SlotIP-GW PortConnection 2.7.38 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension PortConnection 2.7.40 [1-1] SlotSIP-GW Port (KX-TDA30 only)Connection 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeatures Idle Line Access (Local Access) Trunk Group Access Single CO Line Access 2.8.12 [2-7-2] Class of ServiceExternal Call Block 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG SettingsMainLine Hunting Order 2.9.2 [3-1-2] Trunk GroupLocal Access Priority 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Parameter Selection (for Group CO) 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Parameter Selection (for Group CO) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Type Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Parameter Selection (for Group CO) 2.14.1 [8-1] System SettingsARS Mode 2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line SettingsCO Name Feature Guide Reference 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesTAFAS Answer 2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio GainPaging/MOH PagingEPG 1 (External Pager 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) PagingEPG 2 (External Pager 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) PagingEPG (External Pager) (KX-TDA30 only) 2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager Feature Guide Reference 1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Trunk Busy Out

2.7.11 [1-1] SlotLCO PortBusy Out Status 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesBusy Out Cancel 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsExtension FeatureManager 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 4Busy OutBusy Out for Analogue CO Feature Guide Reference 1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

848

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

Trunk Call Limitation

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsTRSExtension-CO Line Call Duration Limit 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 2Extension - CO Call LimitationFor Incoming Call 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk GroupTRG SettingsMain CO-CO Duration Time Extension-CO Duration Time 2.13.5 [7-5] MiscellaneousDial Digits Limitation After AnsweringDial Digits Feature Guide Reference 1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

V
Verification Code Entry
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneousExtension PINLock Counter 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesUser Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension Settings Option 2ARS Itemised Code Option 3Charge Limit 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension Settings Option 2ARS Itemised Code Option 3Charge Limit 2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code Feature Guide Reference 1.9.6 Verification Code Entry

VIP Call
2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup SettingsMiscellaneousVIP Call Mode Feature Guide Reference 1.2.2.5 VIP Call

Virtual Private Network (VPN)

2.7.14 [1-1] SlotBRI PortNetwork Numbering PlanTrunk Property (for CO port) 2.7.16 [1-1] SlotPRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)Network Numbering PlanTrunk Property (for CO port) 2.14.2 [8-2] Leading NumberLeading Number 2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table Leading Number Removed Number of Digits Added Number Feature Guide Reference 1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

PC Programming Manual

849

3.2 Feature Programming References

Virtual PS
2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationRegistration Feature Guide Reference 1.25.6 Virtual PS

Voice Mail (VM) Group

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension PortDPT TypeType (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) 2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension PortDPT TypeVM Unit No. (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) 2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension PortDPT TypeVM Port No. (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) 2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) GroupSystem Settings 2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) GroupUnit Settings 2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings 2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup Settings Feature Guide Reference 1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersDial / IRNA / Recall / ToneRecallTransfer Recall 2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) GroupSystem Settings 2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) GroupUnit Settings 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 4 LCS Recording Mode LCS Answer Mode 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Type Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer) Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 4LCS Recording Mode 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button Type Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer) Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Type Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer) Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer) Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) 2.11.1 [5-1] DoorphoneVM Trunk Group Number 2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port SettingsDIL Tenant Number

850

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

VM Trunk Group 2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Tenant Number VM Trunk Group No. 2.16.6 [10-4] MSN TableMain Tenant Number VM Trunk Group No. Feature Guide Reference 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Voice Mail DTMF Integration

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & CountersMiscellaneousVoice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)Onhook Wait Time 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution GroupGroup SettingsMiscellaneous Programmed Mailbox No. 2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) GroupSystem Settings 2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) GroupGroup Settings 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 1Programmed Mailbox No. 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired ExtensionFlexible Button Type Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer) 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 1Programmed Mailbox No. 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable StationFlexible Button Type Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer) 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible Button Type Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer) Feature Guide Reference 1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

2.7.37 [1-1] SlotIP-Extension Card PropertyCommon SettingsGateway Address Feature Guide Reference 1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

W
Walking COS
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesUser Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsExtension FeatureRemote Operation by Other Extension 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 2Extension PIN 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable StationExtension SettingsOption 2Extension PIN Feature Guide Reference
PC Programming Manual 851

3.2 Feature Programming References

1.9.5 Walking COS

Walking Extension
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesWalking Extension 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsOption 2Extension PIN 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS ConsoleFlexible ButtonPair Extension Feature Guide Reference 1.28.3 Walking Extension

Whisper OHCA
2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering PlanB/NA DND Call Feature BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsCO & SMDROHCA / Whisper OHCA 2.8.17 [2-9] System OptionsOption 5Whisper OHCAfor SLT / APT / KX-T72xx Feature Guide Reference 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

2.7.5 [1-1] SlotExtension PortDPT TypeType (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) 2.7.47 [1-2] Portable StationPS Registration and De-registration 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering PlanMainFeaturesWireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of ServiceCOS SettingsExtension FeatureAccept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired ExtensionExtension SettingsMainWireless XDP Feature Guide Reference 1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

852

PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

PC Programming Manual

853

Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.

1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. 2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

PSQX3658UA

KK0805ET5047

Convert Dremel 3D40 To Klipper
No ratings yet
Convert Dremel 3D40 To Klipper
12 pages
Web Applications and Security It Code 402 Notes
100% (3)
Web Applications and Security It Code 402 Notes
25 pages
Scale 0399
No ratings yet
Scale 0399
1 page
DOC190403AN02EN
No ratings yet
DOC190403AN02EN
48 pages
Simple Data Binding in WPF
No ratings yet
Simple Data Binding in WPF
5 pages
Inside C Sharp Tom Archer 2001
No ratings yet
Inside C Sharp Tom Archer 2001
266 pages
Theory - Common Exam Terms
No ratings yet
Theory - Common Exam Terms
18 pages
PC Programming Manual: KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
100% (1)
PC Programming Manual: KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
842 pages
CMU Application Testing With CMU200
No ratings yet
CMU Application Testing With CMU200
47 pages
Computer Communication Networks CCN Notes
100% (3)
Computer Communication Networks CCN Notes
127 pages
NetSDK - C# Programming Manual (Intelligent Buliding)
No ratings yet
NetSDK - C# Programming Manual (Intelligent Buliding)
220 pages
VR80 - Schema Elettrico
No ratings yet
VR80 - Schema Elettrico
89 pages
RA300 - Schema Elettrico
No ratings yet
RA300 - Schema Elettrico
96 pages
Inferno Programming With Limbo
No ratings yet
Inferno Programming With Limbo
372 pages
Programming Manual TDS520
No ratings yet
Programming Manual TDS520
378 pages
A Guide To Compose PDF
No ratings yet
A Guide To Compose PDF
213 pages
Generic Programming
No ratings yet
Generic Programming
441 pages
Volume 2 - Sound Design
No ratings yet
Volume 2 - Sound Design
192 pages
Data Structures and Programming
No ratings yet
Data Structures and Programming
162 pages
Musical Signal Processing With Labview All Modules 3.9 PDF
No ratings yet
Musical Signal Processing With Labview All Modules 3.9 PDF
167 pages
Python Can
No ratings yet
Python Can
174 pages
Free Batchography: The Art of Batch Files Programming PDF Download
No ratings yet
Free Batchography: The Art of Batch Files Programming PDF Download
2 pages
Wind Generator
No ratings yet
Wind Generator
119 pages
Cakewalk Application Language Programming Guide
No ratings yet
Cakewalk Application Language Programming Guide
101 pages
Fpwingr Guide e
No ratings yet
Fpwingr Guide e
128 pages
Matlab Introduction Tutorial
No ratings yet
Matlab Introduction Tutorial
44 pages
HALion 6 Operation Manual en
No ratings yet
HALion 6 Operation Manual en
550 pages
Altium Designer Intermediate Guide Glen Mercier
No ratings yet
Altium Designer Intermediate Guide Glen Mercier
352 pages
Yamaha RXV 461 DAB Service Manual
No ratings yet
Yamaha RXV 461 DAB Service Manual
94 pages
Why A Common Ground Point For Analogue/Digital?: Piclist
No ratings yet
Why A Common Ground Point For Analogue/Digital?: Piclist
5 pages
PYhon Application Programming Good One
No ratings yet
PYhon Application Programming Good One
151 pages
PG3
No ratings yet
PG3
577 pages
01 ARM Mbed Intro
No ratings yet
01 ARM Mbed Intro
36 pages
Chapter 1: Getting Started With Python and Arduino
No ratings yet
Chapter 1: Getting Started With Python and Arduino
101 pages
1991 Intel 16-Bit Embedded Controller Handbook
No ratings yet
1991 Intel 16-Bit Embedded Controller Handbook
624 pages
Guide For PCB Milling On The LPKF S62
No ratings yet
Guide For PCB Milling On The LPKF S62
14 pages
Learning PAGE - A Python GUI Designer Tutorial v7.0b
No ratings yet
Learning PAGE - A Python GUI Designer Tutorial v7.0b
105 pages
OpenCL Programming
100% (1)
OpenCL Programming
246 pages
USB Audio Class 1.0
No ratings yet
USB Audio Class 1.0
130 pages
dSPACE Tutorial PDF
No ratings yet
dSPACE Tutorial PDF
22 pages
8086 Programming
50% (2)
8086 Programming
203 pages
SRF6U I7-9750H: Intel Coffee Lake H
100% (1)
SRF6U I7-9750H: Intel Coffee Lake H
79 pages
Smpte-292m HD Sdi
No ratings yet
Smpte-292m HD Sdi
9 pages
A New Standard For Safety Laser Scanners
100% (1)
A New Standard For Safety Laser Scanners
32 pages
Audio Coding Thesis
No ratings yet
Audio Coding Thesis
126 pages
HCS08 Instruction Set Summary
No ratings yet
HCS08 Instruction Set Summary
9 pages
USB Protocol - Beginners guide
No ratings yet
USB Protocol - Beginners guide
31 pages
AVR-X8500H, AVC-X8500H (v.1) (SM)
No ratings yet
AVR-X8500H, AVC-X8500H (v.1) (SM)
209 pages
HOWTO Install The MinGW (GCC) Compiler Suite - MinGW
No ratings yet
HOWTO Install The MinGW (GCC) Compiler Suite - MinGW
16 pages
ZK_SenseFace 2A_UM_EN v1.0_20240327_compressed
100% (1)
ZK_SenseFace 2A_UM_EN v1.0_20240327_compressed
125 pages
Dynamo
No ratings yet
Dynamo
7 pages
Android Programming Painless
No ratings yet
Android Programming Painless
115 pages
Iczelion's Tutorial's PDF
100% (1)
Iczelion's Tutorial's PDF
384 pages
Delphi 3 - Delphi and Microsoft Office - Automating Excel 3
No ratings yet
Delphi 3 - Delphi and Microsoft Office - Automating Excel 3
4 pages
True Bypass With Latching Relay: Smudgerd 14 Comments
No ratings yet
True Bypass With Latching Relay: Smudgerd 14 Comments
8 pages
Download
No ratings yet
Download
131 pages
Mosfet Short Channel
No ratings yet
Mosfet Short Channel
52 pages
PT Programming Manual Kxtda
No ratings yet
PT Programming Manual Kxtda
74 pages
KX Tda PCprog
No ratings yet
KX Tda PCprog
726 pages
PT Programming Manual
No ratings yet
PT Programming Manual
74 pages
PC Programming Manual PDF
No ratings yet
PC Programming Manual PDF
982 pages
PT Programming Manual
No ratings yet
PT Programming Manual
77 pages
Correct Maintenance - Cognex DataMan 8500
From Everand
Correct Maintenance - Cognex DataMan 8500
Unique Content
No ratings yet
Computer Numerical Controls Computer Numerical Controls Computer Numerical Controls Computer Numerical Controls
No ratings yet
Computer Numerical Controls Computer Numerical Controls Computer Numerical Controls Computer Numerical Controls
79 pages
Carlson BRx6 GPS Brochure
No ratings yet
Carlson BRx6 GPS Brochure
2 pages
Design of Vehicle Bus Data Acquisition and Fault Diagnosis System Using CAN
No ratings yet
Design of Vehicle Bus Data Acquisition and Fault Diagnosis System Using CAN
4 pages
Iii B.Tech Ii Sem Eie (R18) : Unit - V
No ratings yet
Iii B.Tech Ii Sem Eie (R18) : Unit - V
62 pages
Dedicated Analysis Mode Diagnostic Frequencies Route Navigation Improvement FFT GUI Improved
No ratings yet
Dedicated Analysis Mode Diagnostic Frequencies Route Navigation Improvement FFT GUI Improved
3 pages
Topcon MS 05
No ratings yet
Topcon MS 05
4 pages
L065en 200904 r3 Minielcor
No ratings yet
L065en 200904 r3 Minielcor
2 pages
Connectivity - Toshiba 43V5863DG Manual
No ratings yet
Connectivity - Toshiba 43V5863DG Manual
1 page
Sf-5100 Tech Mode
No ratings yet
Sf-5100 Tech Mode
6 pages
Chapter1 Info
No ratings yet
Chapter1 Info
88 pages
4.1. Connect A Wired and Wireless LAN
No ratings yet
4.1. Connect A Wired and Wireless LAN
5 pages
VibPro 022-000031C
No ratings yet
VibPro 022-000031C
670 pages
SMP Gateway and Conitel RTUs
No ratings yet
SMP Gateway and Conitel RTUs
4 pages
Windows Problems & Solutions
No ratings yet
Windows Problems & Solutions
35 pages
Smart Bag With Theft Prevention and Real Time Tracking
No ratings yet
Smart Bag With Theft Prevention and Real Time Tracking
3 pages
RTU560-RTU211 - Solutions Overview - Brochure
No ratings yet
RTU560-RTU211 - Solutions Overview - Brochure
12 pages
Download
No ratings yet
Download
20 pages
KBA Error Code (Key Person Menu)
No ratings yet
KBA Error Code (Key Person Menu)
1 page
Dissertation GSM
100% (2)
Dissertation GSM
4 pages
Final Ppt1
No ratings yet
Final Ppt1
15 pages
How To Unlock Idea 3G Netsetter - Paul Shaiju
No ratings yet
How To Unlock Idea 3G Netsetter - Paul Shaiju
12 pages
Hacking Cable Modem Compress
No ratings yet
Hacking Cable Modem Compress
320 pages
Contents Page No.: Sms Gateway
No ratings yet
Contents Page No.: Sms Gateway
36 pages
Internship Reporton World Call
No ratings yet
Internship Reporton World Call
17 pages
M100 3G Modem Datasheet
No ratings yet
M100 3G Modem Datasheet
2 pages
PROCEDURES MANUAL Meter 91dw52346
No ratings yet
PROCEDURES MANUAL Meter 91dw52346
5 pages
TL-WDR3600 V1 Qig 7106503913
No ratings yet
TL-WDR3600 V1 Qig 7106503913
2 pages